GBSS16.0 Basic Feature Description

GBSS16.
Basic Feature Description
Issue
04
Date
2015-03-04
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
GBSS16.0
Contents
Contents
1 Basic Features..............................................................................1
1.1 System Improvement......................................................................................................................................................1
1.1.1 GBFD-110000 GBSS9.0 System Improvement..........................................................................................................1
1.1.2 GBFD-110001 GBSS12.0 System Improvement........................................................................................................2
1.1.3 GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance................................................................................................................4
1.1.7 GBFD-110006 GBSS16.0 System Improvement......................................................................................................10
1.2 Radio Service Function................................................................................................................................................12
1.2.1 GBFD-110101 Frequency Band................................................................................................................................12
1.2.2 GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC...........................................................................................................14
1.2.3 GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSM Frequency Band...........................................................................15
1.2.4 GBFD-110201 Telephone Service (TS11).................................................................................................................17
1.2.5 GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12).......................................................................................................18
1.2.6 GBFD-110203 Point To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22).......................................................................19
1.2.7 GBFD-110204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62).......................................................................................................................20
1.2.8 GBFD-110205 Bearer Service (CSD).......................................................................................................................22
1.2.9 GBFD-114101 GPRS................................................................................................................................................23
1.3 Mobility Management..................................................................................................................................................25
1.3.1 GBFD-110301 Location Updating............................................................................................................................25
1.3.2 GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach.....................................................................................................................................27
1.3.3 GBFD-110303 CS Paging.........................................................................................................................................28
1.3.4 GBFD-110304 Authentication...................................................................................................................................31
1.3.5 GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover.......................................................................................................................32
1.3.6 GBFD-110607 Direct Retry......................................................................................................................................35
1.3.7 GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover............................................................................................................................37
1.3.8 GBFD-110401 Basic Cell Selection..........................................................................................................................38
1.3.9 GBFD-110402 Basic Cell Re-selection.....................................................................................................................40
1.4 Connection Management..............................................................................................................................................41
1.4.1 GBFD-110501 Call Control......................................................................................................................................41
1.4.2 GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment...........................................................................................42
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
ii
GBSS16.0
Contents
1.4.3 GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment........................................................................................................................45

1.4.4 GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment..........................................................................................................................46
1.4.5 GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS.....................................................................................47
1.5 Radio Resource Management.......................................................................................................................................49
1.5.1 GBFD-111001 TRX Management.............................................................................................................................49
1.5.2 GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management..................................................................................................................50
1.5.3 GBFD-111003 Radio Common Channel Management.............................................................................................52
1.5.4 GBFD-111004 Radio Dedicated Channel Management...........................................................................................54
1.5.5 GBFD-111005 Enhanced Channel Assignment Algorithm.......................................................................................56
1.6 Operation and Maintenance..........................................................................................................................................58
1.6.1 MRFD-210301 Configuration Management.............................................................................................................58
1.6.2 MRFD-210302 Performance Management...............................................................................................................60
1.6.3 MRFD-210303 Inventory Management....................................................................................................................63
1.6.4 MRFD-210304 Faulty Management.........................................................................................................................66
1.6.5 MRFD-210305 Security Management......................................................................................................................70
1.6.6 MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance............................................................................................................71
1.6.7 MRFD-210310 BTS/NodeB Software USB Download............................................................................................73
1.6.8 GBFD-111202 O&M of BTS....................................................................................................................................75
1.6.9 GBFD-111203 O&M of BSC....................................................................................................................................77
1.6.10 GBFD-111207 BTS Test Function..........................................................................................................................79
1.6.11 GBFD-111210 Integrated Network Management Interface....................................................................................82
1.6.12 GBFD-116501 Man Machine Language (MML)....................................................................................................83
1.6.13 GBFD-116402 Maintenance Mode Alarm..............................................................................................................85
1.6.14 GBFD-113523 NAT Beside OM.............................................................................................................................86
1.7 Software Management..................................................................................................................................................87
1.7.1 MRFD-210401 BSC/RNC Software Management...................................................................................................87
1.7.2 MRFD-210402 BTS/NodeB Software Management................................................................................................89
1.7.3 GBFD-111213 Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS Software...................................................................................91
1.7.4 MRFD-210403 License Management.......................................................................................................................92
1.8 GBSS Network Architecture........................................................................................................................................94
1.8.1 GBFD-114601 Multi-Cell Function..........................................................................................................................94
1.8.2 GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet....................................................................................................................95
1.8.3 GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group..............................................................................................................97
1.8.4 GBFD-118801 BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing..........................................................................................................98
1.8.5 MRFD-210204 Star Topology.................................................................................................................................100
1.8.6 MRFD-210205 Chain Topology..............................................................................................................................101
1.8.7 MRFD-210206 Tree Topology................................................................................................................................102
1.8.8 GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP........................................................................................................103
1.9 System Reliability......................................................................................................................................................104
1.9.1 GBFD-111701 Board Switchover...........................................................................................................................104
1.9.2 GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control.........................................................................................................................105
1.9.3 GBFD-112301 Remote EAC Maintenance.............................................................................................................107
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
iii
GBSS16.0
Contents
1.9.4 GBFD-111214 Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery..................................................................108

1.9.5 GBFD-111211 Reporting the Temperature List of the BTS Equipment Room......................................................109
1.9.6 MRFD-210101 System Redundancy.......................................................................................................................111
1.9.7 MRFD-210102 Operate System Security Management..........................................................................................112
1.9.8 MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation...........................................................................................................................114
1.9.9 MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing.........................................................................................................115
1.9.10 GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.......................................................................117
1.9.11 GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control..............................................................................................................118
1.9.12 GBFD-113801 TRX Cooperation..........................................................................................................................119
1.10 Basic features............................................................................................................................................................121
1.10.1 GBFD-110901 Adjustment of Adaptive Timing Advance....................................................................................121
1.10.2 GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report..............................................................................................122
1.10.3 GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report.......................................................................................124
1.10.4 GBFD-111101 System Information Sending.........................................................................................................125
1.10.5 GBFD-111102 Forced System Information Sending by OMC.............................................................................127
1.10.6 GBFD-111901 Supporting Three-Digit MNC.......................................................................................................128
1.10.7 GBFD-116101 Support of Daylight Saving Time.................................................................................................129
1.10.8 GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment......................................................................................................130
1.10.9 GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan.....................................................................................................................132
1.10.10 GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling Transport Point).................................................................................................133
1.10.11 GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code....................................................................................................134
1.10.12 MRFD-210801 Interface Message Tracing.........................................................................................................136
1.10.13 MRFD-210802 User Signaling Tracing..............................................................................................................137
1.10.14 GBFD-112203 Cell Tracing................................................................................................................................139
1.10.15 GBFD-111301 LAPD Multiplexing at Abis Interface.........................................................................................140
1.10.16 GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception (DRX)................................................................................................142
1.10.17 GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management............................................................................................................143
1.10.18 GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm...........................................................................................144
1.10.19 GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message Filter...............................................................................................147
1.10.20 GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling.................................................................................................................148
1.10.21 GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call.......................................................................................................149
1.10.22 GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency......................................................................................................150
1.10.23 GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.....................................................................................152
1.10.24 GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full Rate.....................................................................................................................153
1.10.25 GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC).................................................................................................155
1.10.26 GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation(AEC).............................................................................................157
1.10.27 GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)..............................................................................................158
1.10.28 GBFD-115702 TrFO............................................................................................................................................160
1.10.29 GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).....................................................................................162
1.10.30 GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).......................................................................163
1.10.31 GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC..............................................................................................................165
1.10.32 GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink..........................................................................166
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
iv
GBSS16.0
Contents
1.10.33 GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink..............................................................................167

1.10.34 GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass......................................................................................................169
1.10.35 GBFD-510604 PICO USB Encryption...............................................................................................................170
1.10.36 GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell...........................................................................................................................172
1.10.37 GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover................................................................................................................174
1.10.38 GBFD-117101 BTS Power Lift for Handover....................................................................................................175
1.10.39 GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm..........................................................................................176
1.10.40 GBFD-115505 AMR Radio Link Timer..............................................................................................................177
1.10.41 GBFD-113522 Encrypted Network Management...............................................................................................179
1.11 Interface Features.....................................................................................................................................................181
1.11.1 GBFD-111801 Ater Interface 4:1 Multiplexing....................................................................................................181
1.11.2 GBFD-119001 Gb Interface Function...................................................................................................................183
1.11.3 GBFD-111803 A Interface Circuit Management...................................................................................................184
1.11.4 GBFD-111804 A Interface Protocol Process.........................................................................................................186
1.11.5 GBFD-111805 A Interface Occupation Rate Monitoring......................................................................................187
1.11.6 GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface......................................................................................189
1.11.7 GBFD-116901 Flex Ater.......................................................................................................................................190
1.12 PS Services Features.................................................................................................................................................192
1.12.1 GBFD-119101 Packet Channel Combination Type..............................................................................................192
1.12.2 GBFD-119102 Packet System Information...........................................................................................................194
1.12.3 GBFD-119103 MS Types......................................................................................................................................195
1.12.4 GBFD-119104 MAC Mode...................................................................................................................................197
1.12.5 GBFD-119105 RLC Mode....................................................................................................................................198
1.12.6 GBFD-119106 Coding Scheme.............................................................................................................................199
1.12.7 GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode............................................................................................................200
1.12.8 GBFD-119108 Network Operation Mode Support...............................................................................................202
1.12.9 GBFD-119109 QoS (Best Effort)..........................................................................................................................204
1.12.10 GBFD-119110 Access.........................................................................................................................................205
1.12.11 GBFD-119111 Assignment..................................................................................................................................206
1.12.12 GBFD-119112 PS Paging....................................................................................................................................208
1.12.13 GBFD-119113 Timing Advance Update.............................................................................................................209
1.12.14 GBFD-119115 Power Control.............................................................................................................................210
1.12.15 GBFD-119116 Packet Uplink Flow Control.......................................................................................................212
1.12.16 GBFD-119117 Flow Control on Gb Interface.....................................................................................................213
1.12.17 GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment......................................................................................................215
1.12.18 GBFD-119205 Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency............................................................................217
1.12.19 GBFD-119303 Load Sharing...............................................................................................................................218
1.12.20 GBFD-119501 Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels..........................................................220
1.12.21 GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF.................................................................................................................221
1.13 Antenna System Solution.........................................................................................................................................223
1.13.1 MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)...................................................................223
1.13.2 MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt..................................................................................................................225
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
GBSS16.0
Contents
1.13.3 MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity...............................................................................................228

1.14 Synchronization Mechanism....................................................................................................................................229
1.14.1 MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock.......................................................................................................................229
1.14.2 MRFD-210502 BSC/RNC Clock..........................................................................................................................231
1.14.3 GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization...........................................................................................................233
1.14.4 GBFD-118606 Clock Over IP...............................................................................................................................234
1.15 Maintainability and Testing......................................................................................................................................236
1.15.1 GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis...................................................................................................................236
1.15.2 GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis.........................................................................................................238
1.15.3 GBFD-119307 Spectrum Scan..............................................................................................................................239
1.15.4 GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing................................................................................................................240
1.15.5 GBFD-118607 IP Performance Monitor...............................................................................................................241
1.15.6 GBFD-118614 GSM PS Service Map...................................................................................................................243
1.15.7 GBFD-115402 LCS (Cell ID + TA)......................................................................................................................245
1.15.8 GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM..............................................................................................................................246
1.15.9 GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing...............................................................................................248
1.16 Documentation.........................................................................................................................................................249
1.16.1 MRFD-210701 Documentation.............................................................................................................................249
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
vi
GBSS16.0
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 UMTS NodeB topology......................................................................................................................72
Figure 1-2 GSM BTS topology.............................................................................................................................72
Figure 1-3 Networking for Link Aggregation.....................................................................................................115
Figure 1-4 Working principle of the RET antenna..............................................................................................226
Figure 1-5 IP PM procedure................................................................................................................................242
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
vii
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Basic Features
1.1 System Improvement

1.1.1 GBFD-110000 GBSS9.0 System Improvement
Availability
This feature was introduced in GBSS9.0.
Summary
The GBSS9.0 complies with 3GPP R6. When using new signaling processing boards and
interface boards, the GBSC supports a maximum of 3072 TRXs and the evolution from the
GSM network to the UMTS network.
Benefits
A large-capacity BSC is provided for this feature. Therefore, the floor area, operation and
maintenance (O&M) cost, power consumption, capital expenditure (CAPEX), and operating
expense (OPEX) are reduced.
The MBSC can be enabled with this feature. This facilitates the evolution from GSM to
UMTS.
Description
The GBSS9.0 complies with 3GPP R6 and provides the following enhancements:
1.
The BSC supports a maximum of 3072 TRXs.
2.
The signaling processing board XPUb and interface boards POUc, GOUc, and FG2c are
introduced to improve the board processing capability.
3.
This feature supports the MBSC. The network can therefore be configured as GSM only,
UMTS only, or GSM&UMTS. This facilitates a smooth evolution from GSM to
GSM&UMTS and then to UMTS.
4.
In MBSC mode, O&M, radio resources management, IP transmission, and hardware

resources can be shared between the BSC and the RNC.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
5.
GBSS9.0 supports EDGE+ evolution, including the Uplink EGPRS2-A, Downlink

EGPRS2-A, MSRD, Dual Carriers in Downlink, and Latency Reduction features.
6.
GBSS9.0 supports IP enhancement, including the A IP over E1/T1, Abis IP over E1/T1,
UDP MUX for A Transmission, A over IP, and 3GPP Protocol Compliance features.
7.
GBSS9.0 supports voice quality improvement, including the AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi
Rate Wide Band), Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), and Enhancement Packet
Loss Concealment (EPLC) features.
8.
GBSS9.0 supports EGPRS service enhancement, including the Conversational QoS, PS

Handover, and Early TBF Establishment features.
9.
GBSS9.0 supports the Dynamic Cell Power Off feature for energy saving.
10. GBSS9.0 supports the Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure feature for
improving the system reliability.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
The following single processing board is new: XPUb The following interface boards are
new: POUc FG2c GOUc
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
Prerequisite Features
NA
Mutually Exclusive Features

NA

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
This feature provides the following enhancements in GBSS12.0:
Increases the BSC capacity.
Enables the BSC support more network topologies.
Improves the reliability of the network topologies.
Enhances maintainability and testability.
Increases the system capacity in GBSS12.0, and less equipment can be used to provide
the same capacity as before. Therefore, the required floor area in the equipment room
and the power consumed by each TRX decrease.
Enables the GBSS12.0 support more network topologies to meet the development of allIP network.
Improves the reliability of the network topologies in GBSS12.0. In this way, the
reliability of the GBSS system is improved in the case of sudden traffic burst.
Improves the O&M efficiency in GBSS12.0.
Benefits
Description
The GBSS12.0 System Improvement feature is described as follows:
1. The BSC capacity is increased.
In full configuration, the BSC supports a maximum of 4096 TRXs and a traffic volume of
24,000 Erlang.
2. The BSC supports more network topologies.
The A interface supports TDM/IP dual stack and supports the gradual evolution from A over
TDM to A over IP.
3. The reliability of the network topologies is improved.
Various flow control measures are taken to improve the reliability of the GBSS system in the
case of sudden traffic burst.
4. The maintainability and testability are enhanced.
GBSS12.0 provides measures to detect faults in PS and CS services. In this way, problems on
the existing network can be quickly identified and located, improving the network quality.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Copyright Huawei
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.1.3 GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS equipment complies with the 3GPP specifications.
Benefits
In compliance with 3GPP R6, this feature enables the BSC interwork with other network
elements (NEs) that comply with 3GPP R99, R4, R5, or R6. With this feature, the BSC
improves the competitiveness of operators and can provide diverse services with optimal
performance for subscribers.
Description
GBSS6.1 complies with 3GPP R99 and R4.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
Complies with 3GPP R99 and R4.
GBSS8.0
GBSS8.1
GBSS9.0
Complies with 3GPP R99, R4, R5, and R6.
GBSS12.0
Complies with 3GPP R99, R4, R5, and R6.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBSS13.0
Complies with 3GPP R99, R4, R5, R6, and R8.
GBSS14.0
Complies with 3GPP R99, R4, R5, R6, R8, and R9.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
If new features defined in 3GPP R6 are required, MSs must comply with 3GPP R6.
CN
If new features defined in 3GPP R6 are required, the CN must comply with 3GPP R6.
Other NEs
If new features defined in 3GPP R6 are required, the interfaces on the related NEs must
comply with 3GPP R6.
NA

NA

Availability
Summary
Use of a new TC board (DPUf) and enhanced system integration
Support for VAMOS
Improved voice quality and support for the E-coder, EPLC, and EVAD
Support for identifying instance messaging services
Improved transmission efficiency and support for Abis IPHC (IP header compression)
and Abis PPP multiplexing.
Enhanced maintainability and testability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Benefits
A BSC cabinet supports a maximum of 4096 TRXs. This reduces the floor area in the
equipment room and the power consumption per TRX.
The provided VAMOS solution improves the spectral efficiency and network capacity.
The voice quality improvement enhances customer satisfaction.
Identifying instance messaging services improves the radio resource usage and increases
operators' data services income.
The Abis transmission solution enhances the transmission efficiency.
The enhanced maintainability and testability improve O&M efficiency and network
security.
Description
The GBSS13.0 System Improvement feature is described as follows:
1. The integration of the BSC system is enhanced.
A new TC board DPUf is introduced. In full configuration, a BSC cabinet supports a
maximum of 4096 TRXs and a traffic volume of 24,000 Erlang.
2. The spectral efficiency and system capacity are increased.
With the increasing number of radio CS subscribers and the implementation of 900 MHz
refarming in some countries, the GSM spectral resources may be limited. The VAMOS
solution supported by GBSS13.0 improves spectral efficiency, relieving the limitation on
system capacity.
3. The voice quality is enhanced.
With the E-coder function, the voice coding and decoding algorithms of EFR and AMR users
are optimized to improve user experience and increase the MOS. In addition, the improved
VAD technology is used to enhance the identification of ring back tone and music. As a result,
more than 99% of the music can be identified and the MOS for the ring back tone increases
by more than 0.1 points.
4. The transmission efficiency is improved.
Abis IPHC (IP header compression) is supported to improve the Abis transmission efficiency.
5. The testability and maintainability are improved.
Operation and maintenance (O&M) and fault locating functions, such as the BTS IP
transmission real-time monitoring, are provided to improve the O&M efficiency.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
A new TC board DPUf is added.
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Copyright Huawei
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA

Availability
Summary
Increased system capacity
Decreased number of BTS migrations caused by internal GBSS problems
Improved load balancing capability on the GBSS control plane
Increases the system capacity, and uses fewer devices to provide the same capacity as
before. Therefore, the required floor area in the equipment room and the power
consumed by each TRX decrease.
Decreases the number of BTS migrations.
Balances loads on the control plane by fully utilizing the hardware on the control plane.
Benefits
Description
The GBSS14.0 System Improvement feature provides the following improvements:
The BSC capacity is increased.

In all-IP transmission mode, a fully-configured BSC supports a maximum of 8192 TRXs
and a maximum traffic volume of 45,000 Erlang.
The transmission resource management method is optimized on the MPU board.

The BSC implements load balancing among different MPU boards based on the load and
transmission resource on each MPU board. This reduces the number of BTS migrations
caused by an imbalanced load among MPU boards.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
CPU loads of boards on the control plane are significantly balanced.

Copyright Huawei
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
This fully utilizes the processing capability of the control plane.
New boards are added.

DPUe, FG2d, and GOUd boards are added to replace DPUg, FG2a, and GOUa boards,
respectively.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
The DPUe, FG2d, and GOUd boards are added.
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA

Availability
This feature is introduced in GBSS15.0.
Summary
Enhanced system integration with the introduction of the BSC6910
Expanded network capacity
Optimized BSC flow control mechanism
Improved system maintenance capability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Benefits
This feature provides the following features:
Improves the BSC integrity, and use fewer devices to provide the same capacity as
before. Therefore, the required floor area in the equipment room and the power
consumed by each TRX decrease.
Increases network capacity due to optimization of the transmission bandwidth and radio
resource management in IP transmission mode.
Improves system reliability due to optimization of the flow control mechanism.
Increases the O&M efficiency of the GBSS system.
Description
The GBSS15.0 System Improvement feature provides the following improvements:
The integration of the BSC system is enhanced.

The BSC6910 product model is introduced. In all-IP transmission mode where 10GE
ports are used, a fully-configured BSC6910 supports a maximum of 24,000 TRXs, a
maximum traffic volume of 150,000 Erlang, and a maximum bandwidth of 8000 Mbit/s.
Network capacity is increased.

The IP QOS feature is enhanced to implement the adaptive adjustment of Abis interface
bandwidth and access control optimization. This increases the bandwidth usage
efficiency and allows more subscribers to access the network.
To increase the radio resource usage efficiency, the efficiency in which PDCHs carry
TBFs, and the number of admitted PS subscribers, the following optional features are
introduced in GBSS15.0:
PS Access Congestion Balancing
Small Packet Load Balancing
Duty-Cycle-based PDCH Management
The flow control mechanism is optimized on the BSC.

With the optimized flow control mechanism, the GBSS15.0 implements the following
functions:
DSP self-healing processing
A interface robustness protection
Signaling delay-based flow control
These functions improve system reliability during peak hours.
The GBSS system maintenance capability is improved.

The maintenance and testability of multi-site cells are improved and PS counter
measurement is optimized. In addition, the following enhancements are provided:
Enhanced maintainability and testability
KPI monitoring
Isolated problem location
Network parameter optimization
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
The OIUb, EIUb, PEUc, and SPUb boards are added
BSC6910 Hardware
The EOMUa, EGPUa, EXPUa, ENIUa, ESAUa, and EXOUa are added.
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA

Availability
This feature is introduced in GBSS16.0.
Summary
The GBSS16.0 System Improvement feature provides the following system capability
enhancements:
BTS supporting new hardware
BSC6910 supporting the A over TDM mode
GSM network capacity expansion
GSM network quality improvement
GSM/LTE interoperation user experience improvement
GSM network sharing enhancement
GSM O&M experience improvement
Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
Facilitates the GSM-to-SingleRAN evolution and reduces the SingleRAN networking

cost.
Allows the use of the large-capacity BSC6910 in A over TDM mode.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
10
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Expands GSM network capacity and improves GSM network quality to provide better
solutions for GSM/LTE refarming or tight frequency reuse scenarios.
Guarantees the quality of service (QoS) of LTE CSFB calls and improves the access
performance and call quality of LTE CSFB users.
Supports network sharing-related contents in 3GPP Release 10 and supports the MOCN
solution based on interconnection to MSCs from different vendors.
Improves O&M efficiency during the networking change from Abis over TDM to Abis
over IP.
Description
BTS supporting new hardware

Supports UBBP boards, which can provide baseband processing services for multiple
modes in addition to the GSM mode.
BSC6910 supporting the A over TDM mode

Introduces DPUf boards supporting the A over TDM mode to the BSC6910, and supports
features related to the A over TDM mode, such as EVAD, TFO, and AMR Coding Rate
Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.
GSM network capacity expansion

Introduces the features VAMOS FR, VAMOS I&II Support, and IBCA II, and enhances
the features VAMOS, Mute SAIC MS Identification, and VAMOS Call Drop Solution.
GSM network quality improvement

Introduces the feature MICC, which can significantly improve uplink anti-interference
performance, and enhances the feature Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing, which
supports Um-interface speech frame repairing in AMR FR 5.9 kbit/s and AMR HR 5.9
kbit/s coding schemes.
GSM/LTE interoperation user experience improvement

Introduces the feature CSFB QoS, which supports the following functions:
Very early TCH assignment for CSFB calls
Preferential allocation of TCHFs
Preempting channels occupied by non-CSFB calls during channel congestion
Prohibiting CSFB calls to perform VAMOS channel multiplexing
Enhances the feature CSFB, which helps quickly identify the CSFB mobile-originated
calls (MOCs) and mobile-terminated calls (MTCs) and optimize the procedure of
reporting Utran Classmark Change messages for CSFB calls.
GSM network sharing enhancement

Introduces the feature MOCN II, which supports the basic MOCN procedure defined in
3GPP 23.251 Release 10. In the MOCN procedure, users of different operators are routed
to corresponding CNs.
GSM O&M experience improvement
Supports configuring transmission data, adjusting and testing the transmission status, and
querying the port status for Abis IP over ETH in Abis over TDM mode.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
11
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
The A over TDM networking mode requires the DPUf board.
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The baseband extension mode requires the UBBP board.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
The baseband extension mode requires the UBBP board.
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.2 Radio Service Function

1.2.1 GBFD-110101 Frequency Band
Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS equipment supports the following frequency bands:
GSM850
GSM900
DCS1800
PCS1900
Benefits
With this feature, the BTS supports multiple frequency bands and therefore TRX boards of
different frequency bands can be inserted into the same cabinet. Therefore, the number of
required cabinets and the floor area required for the equipment room are reduced.
GBSS equipment supports multiple frequency bands. Therefore, the GSM network can be
deployed with different frequency bands to meet the requirements of operators.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
12
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
The following table lists the frequency bands supported by Huawei GBSS equipment.
Frequency
Band
Uplink
Frequency (MS
TX, BTS RX)
Downlink
Frequency
(BTS TX, MS
RX)
ARFCN
850 MHz
824-C849MHz
869-C894MHz
128-C251
900 MHz
890-C915 MHz
935-C960 MHz
1-C124
1800 MHz
1710-C1785 MHz
1805-C1880 MHz
512-C885
1900 MHz
1850-C1910 MHz
1930-C1990 MHz
512-C810
(P-GSM)
The GSM900 frequency band contains the standard P-GSM and extended E-GSM and RGSM. The GSM900 listed in the preceding table refers to P-GSM. For details about E-GSM
and R-GSM, see the description about optional feature GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM
and R-GSM Frequency Band in GBSS15.0 Optional Feature Description.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support For more information, see the product description documentation of the
corresponding RF module.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
13
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.2.2 GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC

Availability
Summary
This feature enables operators to deploy a multi-band network, that is, one BSC can support
multiple frequency bands. Additionally, this feature enables operators to expand frequency
bands to alleviate the problem of insufficient frequency resources.
Benefits
This feature enables a network to support multiple frequency bands and enables operators to
expand frequency bands.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900, and GSM850 and therefore supports
a multi-band network sharing one BSC. The DCS1800 and PCS1900, however, have the
following restrictions:
A DCS1800 cell and PCS1900 cell cannot be configured as neighboring cell for each
other.
One cell's neighboring cell cannot have a DCS1800 cell and PCS1900 cell at the same
time.
Huawei GBSS supports the following types of multi-band networks:
GSM850 + GSM900 + DCS1800
GSM850 + GSM900 + PCS1900
In a multi-band network, parameters associated with cell selection and handover can be set
based on the specific frequency band so that the cell selection, cell reselection, and handover
between different bands can be implemented.
The dual-band network is a common multi-band network and consists of following types:
GSM900 + DCS1800
GSM850 + PCS1900
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Copyright Huawei
14
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.2.3 GBFD-114901 Support for E-GSM and R-GSM

Frequency Band
Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS equipment supports the E-GSM900 and R-GSM900 frequency bands.
Benefits
This feature enables services to be processed on the extended frequency bands and
extends the frequency range.
The state radio regulatory commission of each country is responsible for the division and
selling of the frequency resources of the country. The GSM900 is the commonly used
frequency band. To fully utilize frequency resources, the P-GSM900 frequency band is
extended to bring more benefits to governments and operators.
In this way, the related government organizations can make profits by selling this frequency
band.
In addition, the operators obtain more radio resources and make more profits by providing
better services to end users.
Description
The operating frequency of E-GSM (including the standard GSM900) is as follows:
Uplink: 880-C915 MHz
Downlink: 925-C960 MHz
ARFCN: 0-C124, 975-C1023
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
15
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The operating frequency of R-GSM (dedicated to the railway communications) is as follows:
Uplink: 876-C915 MHz
Downlink: 921-C960 MHz
ARFCN: 0-C124, 955-C1023
The E-GSM900, R-GSM900, and P-GSM900 belong to the same frequency band while their
frequencies are not adjacent. Therefore, the extended frequency bands of E-GSM and R-GSM
are introduced. The E-GSM extended frequency band refers to the E-GSM frequency band
excluding the P-GSM frequency band. The R-GSM extended frequency band refers to the RGSM frequency band excluding the E-GSM frequency band.
For the cells configured with E-GSM extended frequency band or R-GSM frequency band,
the system adopts different channel assignment strategies according to the frequency band
supporting capability of the MS and the channel. During the immediate assignment, the
system assigns a channel to the MS based on the frequency band supported by the BCCH
carrier. When assigning a channel, the system obtains the classmark of the MS and then
determines whether a channel is supported by the MS. Among all the channels supported by
the MS, the system preferentially assigns a channel that is not in the intersection of the
frequency bands to the MS. For example, if an MS supports the E-GSM band, and the
available channels are carried on the P-GSM band and the E-GSM extended band, the system
preferentially assigns the channel on the E-GSM extended band to the MS. The band
intersection, that is, P-GSM band, is reserved for other MSs with weak multiband capability.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
MS
The MS must support this feature.
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
16
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.2.4 GBFD-110201 Telephone Service (TS11)

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the telephone service (TS11) specified in GSM specifications.
The telephone service can be classified into mobile-originated calls (MOC) and mobileterminated calls (MTC). The full rate (FR) speech coding is adopted by default. The speech
calls can be made between MSs within a GSM PLMN or between a PLMN MS and a public
switched telephone network (PSTN) MS or other communication networks.
Benefits
Telephone service is one of the basic speech service functions provided by operators. The
excellent speech service provided by Huawei BSS provides the following benefits:
Telephone services with high quality, improving user experience for operators
Better brand reputation, increasing the operators' profit
Description
Telephone service (TS11) specified in GSM specifications is a basic function of the GSM
equipment, such as Huawei GBSS.
The telephone service is classified into MOCs and MTCs. The telephone service supports the
speech calls between MSs within a GSM PLMN, also between a PLMN MS and a PSTN MS
subscriber or other communication networks.
In the BSS, the transcoder&rate adaptation unit (TRAU) is responsible for the speech
conversion between the GSM speech coding and the 64 kbit/s PCM coding. If the speech
coding schemes specified in optional features are not activated for a common call, the full rate
speech coding is adopted by default.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
MS
Copyright Huawei
17
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.2.5 GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12)

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the emergency call service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications
and provides a high priority for the emergency call service.
Benefits
Emergency call service enables a subscriber to make calls for assistance in case of emergency.
For subscribers in emergencies, the emergency call service provides the following benefits:
Subscribers can dial the specified emergency service number free of charge even if the
MS is suspended or the subscriber is a defaulting subscriber.
The emergency call service takes precedence over other services in accessing the
network. Even located in congested cells, the subscribers can contact the aid agencies by
dialing the emergency service number.
Description
Emergency call service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications is a basic function of the
GSM equipment, such as Huawei GBSS.
The emergency call takes precedence over common calls. Compared with the common call
procedure, the emergency call procedure is simplified to accelerate the call establishment and
to ensure a high call establishment success rate. For example, during the immediate
assignment procedure, the BSC can directly assign a traffic channel (TCH) for an emergency
call so that the call quickly and easily occupies radio resources.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
18
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.2.6 GBFD-110203 Point To Point Short Message

Service (TS21, TS22)
Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the TS21 and TS22 services specified in GSM specifications, that is,
the sending and receiving of short messages.
Benefits
The point-to-point short message service is widely used. As a value-added service, the short
message service is a complement to the GSM mobile speech services. An MS can exchange
information with other MSs by using the point-to-point short message services.
This Point To Point Short Message Service feature provides the following benefits:
Meeting subscribers' increasingly diversified data service requirements
Becoming an increasingly important source of operators' revenue and diversifying the

operators' profit portfolio
Enriching the operation modes of the service providers (SPs).
Description
Mobile-terminated (MT) point-to-point short message service (TS11) and mobile-originated
(MO) point-to-point short message service (TS12) specified in GSM specifications are basic
functions of the GSM equipment, such as Huawei GBSS.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
19
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The point-to-point short message service can be used to exchange information in plain text.
With this service, subscribers can exchange text information with each other and the operators
can send service promotion information and promotional information. Both the short message
center (SMC) and the MS can initiate the point-to-point short message service. The BSS
supports the sending and receiving of short messages. On receiving the signaling of a short
message from the MSC, the BSS forwards the short message to the MS. In turn, on receiving
a short message from the MS, the BSS forwards the short message to the MSC.
The short message here refers to the one that is transmitted through SS7 signaling. The short
message service implemented in the PS domain is not included. The PS short message is a
function mainly implemented by the SGSN and is treated as a common data service on the
BSC side.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
This feature requires support from the SMS center.
NA

NA
1.2.7 GBFD-110204 G3 Fax (TS61, TS62)

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the TS61 and TS62 services specified in GSM specifications. TS61
refers to the G3 alternate voice and fax service and TS62 refers to the G3 automatic voice and
fax service. The TS61 and TS62 services enable an MS to send and receive faxes.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
20
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Benefits
The G3 fax feature is a value-added mobile data service that allows MSs to send and receive
voice faxes. This service is a complement to the GSM mobile speech service and enables MSs
to carry out fax services.
Enables an MS to receive and send faxes any time anywhere and meeting diversified
requirements from the subscribers.
Enables operators to provide mobile fax service to enrich their service scopes and
revenue sources.
Description
TS61 fax and TS62 fax services specified in GSM specifications are basic functions of the
GSM equipment, such as Huawei GBSS.
With the TS61 fax and TS62 fax services, an MS can send and receive voice faxes.
The fax service is realized by using other upper-layer protocols. Therefore, the BSS provides
the lower-layer connection but does not process the upper-layer services.
The main device required by this feature is deployed in the CN.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
21
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.2.8 GBFD-110205 Bearer Service (CSD)

Availability
Summary
Huawei BSS supports the traditional CSD services and the data services with multiple rates.
Benefits
Both CSD and GPRS are standard 2G data services.
Data services are widely used. As a value-added mobile data service, CSD is a complement to
the GSM mobile speech services. With the CSD service, an MS can connect to the operators'
data network or even the Internet.
Meets subscribers' increasingly diversified data service requirements and enables data
transfer between networks
Becomes an increasingly important source of operators' revenue and increases the

operators' profit
Helps operators provide diversified services on the data platform of CSD to attract more
subscribers and thereby achieve more profit.
Be implemented without adding the PCU device or hardware and software (This reduces
the space required by the equipment room and facilitates the management of the
equipment room. Moreover, the CSD increases the choices of data services.)
Description
Huawei GBSS supports various bearer services specified in GSM specifications. The GBSS
provides the lower-layer connection but does not process the upper-layer services. The bearer
service can be used in low-rate data service applications. Huawei GBSS supports the
following bearer services:
BS21 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 300 bit/s
BS23 asynchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 1200/75 bit/s

(see remark 1)
BS31 synchronous duplex circuit data service, transparent/nontransparent, 1200 bit/s
BS41 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 300 bit/s
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
22
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
BS43 PAD access service, asynchronous circuit, transparent/nontransparent, 1200/75

bit/s (see remark 1)
BS51 packet access service, 2.4 kbit/s, synchronous, UDI, nontransparent
BS61 alternate speech/data service, transparent/nontransparent
BS81 speech followed by data service
Remark 1: Bearer services BS23 and BS43 apply only to MOCs. In BS23 and BS43 services,
the data rate of 75 bit/s applies to the uplink and the data rate of 1200 bit/s applies to the
downlink.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0
The GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data is introduced as an optional feature.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.2.9 GBFD-114101 GPRS

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
23
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
The General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is a type of end-to-end packet switched service
based on the GSM technology.
Benefits
By providing data services, the GPRS helps increase operators' revenue and the proportion of
packet service (PS) in mobile services.
Description
Huawei GPRS is implemented by adding GPRS support nodes (GSNs) and packet control
units (PCU) on the GSM system and upgrading the software. In this manner, the GPRS
provides quick access of PS services for mobile subscribers. There are two PCU types: builtin PCU and external PCU. A Huawei external PCU is connected to the BSC on the Pb
interface.
Huawei GPRS has an open system architecture, which facilitates smooth capacity expansion.
The standardized interfaces ensure equipment compatibility, support QoS features, and
support dynamic allocation of radio resources. In addition, the flexible networking and
configuration save a large amount of CAPEX for operators at the initial phase of the GPRS
service operation. In addition, Huawei GPRS provides abundant PS services, such as mobile
Internet access, e-Commerce (e-Bank and e-Currency), trunking management, remote control
or measurement, booking system (used by hotels, theaters, and airplanes), and group call
services (such as releasing information).
Huawei GPRS provides three functions:
Managing radio links and resources:
The radio link management includes link establishment, maintenance, and release.
The radio resource management includes encoding/decoding, configuration, and

multiplexing of the radio packet channel and conversion between CS channels and PS
channels.
Controlling MS access
By controlling the access of MSs, the GPRS prevents channel contention and allocates
channels to MSs according to the requested QoS.
Providing routes for packet data transmission
The GPRS system provides routes to transmit the packet data to the SGSN and receives the
downlink data from the SGSN.
According to GSM specifications, the GPRS can use four coding schemes: CS-1, CS-2, CS-3,
and CS-4. The recommended CS-1 and CS-2 coding schemes ensure 100% and 90% cell
coverage, respectively, and meet the co-channel interference requirement (CIR9 dB).
However, they provide a data rate of only 9.05 kbit/s and 13.4 kbit/s (containing the RLC
block head), respectively. The reason is that the half-rate and 1/3 rate bits in the RLC blocks
are used for forward error correction (FEC). This reduces the CIR requirement and the
transmission rate.
To increase the transmission rate, Huawei provides CS-3 and CS-4 coding schemes. The CS-3
and CS-4 coding schemes provide the transmission rate of 15.6 kbit/s and 21.4 kbit/s
(containing the RLC block head), respectively. In addition, they have higher CIR
requirements. During data transmission, the BSC dynamically adjusts the channel encoding or
decoding scheme according to the retransmission rate of RLC blocks on the uplink or
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
24
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
downlink temporary block flow (TBF). This improves the transmission rate while maintaining
the data transmission quality, maximizing the radio resource usage. In addition Huawei GPRS
supports dynamic conversion among CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, and CS-4.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
A PCU, a packet-service processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
CN
The CN must support this feature.
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.3 Mobility Management

1.3.1 GBFD-110301 Location Updating
Availability
Summary
To ensure that services such as paging services can be processed properly, the network needs
to know the location of an MS. The MS registers to the network by performing the location
update procedure. In this way, the VLR and HLR keep track of the location information about
the MS, ensuring the normal communication between MSs.
Benefits
Location update is a basic feature for operators to provide the CS speech services.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
25
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
The location update procedure is the signaling procedure for the MS to update the location
information on the network. This ensures that the location information about the MS stored in
the HLR and VLR is consistent with the actual location information about the MS.
The general location update procedure is as follows:
1.
The MS initiates the access request with the location update as the access cause;
2.
The network side allocates a signaling channel to the MS;
3.
The MS sends a location update request on this signaling channel;
4.
The NSS side determines whether to accept the location update request based on the
identity of the MS.
In different scenarios, three types of specific location update procedures are initiated: normal
location updating, periodic location updating, and IMSI attach location updating.
Normal location updating

When the location of an MS changes, the MS initiates a normal location update
procedure. During the normal location update procedure, the network side may initiate
other supplementary procedures, such as the classmark interrogation, identification
request, authentication, and ciphering mode setting.
Periodic location updating

When timer T3212 expires, the MS initiates the periodic updating procedure. The value
of T3212 is provided by the network in the system information type 3 message. The MS
resolves this system information message to obtain the value of the T3212 timer.
IMIS attach location update procedure

The IMSI attach location update is a complement to the IMSI detach procedure. The
network uses the system information type 3 message to indicate whether the IMSI attach
and IMSI detach are allowed. If the network indicates that the IMSI attach and IMSI
detach are required, the MS triggers the IMSI attach procedure when the IMSI is
activated. When the MS activates the IMSI or the MS has moved from a non-coverage
area to a coverage area, the IMSI attach procedure is triggered if the IMSI attach is
allowed and the stored location area of the MS is the same as the location area of the
serving cell.
Location update ensures smooth communication by updating the information about the
location of MSs stored in the VLR and HLR in real time.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Copyright Huawei
26
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.3.2 GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach

Availability
Summary
After the IMSI of a subscriber is detached from the network, the MSC/VLR marks the
subscriber as invalid and will no longer send any paging message to this subscriber.
Benefits
IMSI detach is a basic feature for operators to provide the CS speech services.
Description
IMSI attach and detach are IMSI-specific procedures. When an MS is powered off, it sends
the MSC a message containing the detach request. After receiving this message, the
MSC/VLR sets the subscriber status to invalid and will no longer page this subscriber.
During the IMSI detach, the subscriber status is recorded only on the MSC/VLR but not on
the HLR. After the MS is powered on again, the MS performs the IMSI attach procedure if the
MS still resides in the location area where it resides before it is powered off. If the MS resides
in a different location area, the MS performs the normal location update procedure to update
the new location information in the HLR and VLR.
The MSC informs the MS whether the IMSI attach or detach is allowed by sending the system
information type 3 message.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
BSC6910 Hardware
Copyright Huawei
27
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.3.3 GBFD-110303 CS Paging

Availability
Summary
By performing the paging procedure, the network instructs the MS to access the network as
the called party to complete the call establishment.
Benefits
Paging is a basic feature for operators to provide the CS speech services. The paging
algorithm determines the paging efficiency of the GBSS.
Huawei GBSS paging algorithm provides the following benefits:
Guarantees the paging processing capability while maintaining the paging efficiency and
reducing the paging load. The paging processing capability is one of the KPIs that
indicate the system capability.
Decreases the complaints and increases customer satisfaction by preventing paging

losses and therefore increasing the call success rate.
Description
The paging procedure is described as follows:
To answer calls in a timely manner, the MS in idle state listens to the paging channel in real
time. If there is a paging message to the MS, the MS responds to the paging and completes the
subsequent procedure as a called party.
Pagings are classified into PS pagings and CS pagings. To transmit downlink data to an MS,
the SGSN initiates the PS paging procedure. If a packet common control channel (PCCCH) is
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
28
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
configured, the PS paging message is transmitted on the PCCCH. If no PCCCH is configured,

the PS message is transmitted on the paging channel (PCH).
The CS paging message is sent on the PCH. When a call arrives at the MSC that serves the
MS, the MSC determines the location area of the MS and sends the paging message to all
BSCs in this location area. The BSCs determine the paging cell based on the location area and
determine the paging group to which the MS belongs based on the IMSI. Then, the BSC sends
the paging message to the corresponding BTS. The BTS then sends the paging message to the
MS over an assigned PCH.
Huawei GBSS supports the three standard paging modes:
Common paging mode

The paging message is transmitted only over the configured PCH and the IMSI defined
channel.
Complete paging mode

When an MS group is informed to work in this mode, the paging message to any MS in
this group can be transmitted over any PCH on the same timeslot. This avoids paging
message loss when the PCH configuration is dynamically changed.
Spaced paging mode

The BSS sends the paging message to a group over another paging channel to avoid
temporary overload. That is, the MS that receives common paging messages over
channel N can obtain the paging messages over the next paging channel (N+2).
Huawei GBSS supports paging message queuing, paging retransmission, simultaneous
processing of various pagings, and paging flow control. This can effectively improve the
paging capacity of the BSC.
Paging message queuing

The transmission of paging messages on the Um interface is limited on the basis of
paging groups. The paging message of one paging group can only be transmitted on the
paging block corresponding to the paging group. Therefore, the paging message queuing
is implemented on the BTS. That is, during the period when the BTS waits for
transmission, the paging messages from the BSC are buffered on the BTS. Upon the
transmission, the BTS selects the appropriate paging messages from the queue to
transmit on the corresponding block. If many paging messages have the same
transmission priority, the BTS processes these messages according to the FIFO principle.
Paging retransmission
Generally, both the CN and BSS of the GSM network allow paging retransmission. A
two-level retransmission mechanism is provided. One retransmission is initiated by the
CN to handle long intermittence during the paging transmission. The retransmission
initiated by the CN takes a relatively long time. The other retransmission is implemented
on the BTS. The retransmission initiated by the BTS takes a relatively short time. Hence,
the two-level retransmission mechanism reduces the signaling load on the Abis interface
and A interface. Huawei BSS supports the paging retransmission. That is, when there is
no paging message or immediate assignment message to be transmitted on the
corresponding sending block, the paging messages that are already transmitted are
retransmitted on this sending block. The maximum number of paging retransmissions
can be specified by the system parameter.
Simultaneous processing of multiple paging messages

Each paging command from the BSC comprises only one paging message sent to one
MS, but each paging request on the Um interface may pack a maximum of four paging
messages sent to four different MSs. Therefore, to improve the efficiency of the paging
processing, the number of paging commands to the MS included in the paging message
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
29
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
on the Um interface should be as many as that is specified. In detail, a maximum of four

paging messages can be included. When the sending block of a paging group is polled,
the BTS searches for the paging messages to be transmitted in the paging queue
corresponding to the paging group. Then, based on the maximum combination principle,
the BTS packs these paging messages or several of the paging messages as appropriate
type of paging request on the Um interface. The paging request is then sent on the
sending block to the MSs. In this way, the paging commands of multiple MSs can be
transmitted on the Um interface.
Paging flow control

When the paging flow from the MSC exceeds the processing capability of the BSS, the
BSS initiates the selective flow control based on the current network situation to ensure
the robustness and proper operation of the system, the high efficiency of the paging
capacity, and the smoothness and stability of services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.3.4 GBFD-110304 Authentication

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
30
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
Authentication is an identity verification procedure. With the authentication, only legal
subscribers can access the network.
Benefits
Authentication is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. This
feature ensures that only the legal subscribers can access the network, thereby guaranteeing
the security of the network and services.
Description
Authentication is a procedure in which the GSM network verifies the validity of the identity
of an MS.
The purpose of authentication is to prevent unauthorized subscribers from accessing the
network and to protect the private information of authorized subscribers.
The network initiates the authentication procedure in the following situations:
The MS requests to change the information restored in VLR or HLR.
Service access such as MOC, MTC, MS activation or deactivation, or supplementary

services is required.
Initial network access is required after MSC/VLR reboot.
The ciphering key Kc sequence is mismatched.
The network needs to determine whether the MS is accessible to network.
Parameters for the MS to calculate new ciphering key is required.
The authentication procedure is always initiated and controlled by the network.

After the RR connection between the MSC and the BSS is established, the network can decide
whether to initiate the authentication procedure to verify the subscriber's identity. The BSS is
mainly responsible for the RR connection establishment and the transparent transmission
between the MSC and the MS. When the network determines to initiate the authentication
procedure, the MSC/VLR sends the MS an Authentication Request message to trigger the
authentication procedure. The MS responds to this request with an Authentication Response
message and reports the calculated result to the CN for approval for the authentication.
Authentication strengthens the network identification of subscribers and ensures their security.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
31
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.3.5 GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover

Availability
Summary
This feature involves the following phases: MR reporting, MR processing, handover decision,
and handover execution. In the handover decision phase, an appropriate candidate cell is
selected for the handover.
Benefits
With this feature, the MSs in movement can continue with the ongoing call.
Handover is an important method to ensure the voice quality.
Handover optimizes the overall performance of the system by adjusting the traffic volume of
the cells.
Description
The GSM service area is composed of a number of cells that provide continuous coverage.
The handover technique is introduced into the GSM system to enable the MSs in movement to
continue with the ongoing calls within the coverage area, optimizing the network
performance.
This feature involves the following phases: MR reporting, MR processing, handover decision,
and handover execution. The NEs involved in the handover include the MS, BSS, and MSC.
The measurement and MR reporting are implemented by the MS and BTS. The MS measures
the downlink level strength, downlink quality, and TA of the GSM cell and then reports the
information to the BTS. The BTS measures the receive level strength and quality of the MS
and then reports all the information to the BSC. Generally, the MR processing is implemented
by the BSC. The BSC performs the basic functions such as filtering and interpolation to
provide a reference for the subsequent handover decisions. If the BTS performs the preprocessing of MRs, the MR processing can be implemented by the BTS. Based on different
factors such as radio signal quality, radio signal level, speed, load, and requirement of
operators, the handover decision algorithm determines which candidate cell to be used as the
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
32
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
target cell for handover. After the target cell is selected, the handover procedure is initiated. If
the handover failure or rollback occurs, the MR indicating the result is reported to the
handover decision module. Then, the handover decision algorithm selects another candidate
cell as the target cell.
The handover decision algorithm is categorized into five types: high-speed railway fast
handover, emergency handover, enhanced dual-band network handover, load handover, and
normal handover. The emergency handover is of five types: TA handover, bad quality
handover, quick level drop handover, interference handover, and no downlink measurement
report handover. The normal handover is of the following types: edge handover, hierarchical
handover, PBGT handover, concentric cell handover, AMR handover, and better 3G cell
handover.
High-speed railway fast handover: This handover reduces the filtering time, speeds up the
handover and determines whether to trigger the handover based on the frequency offset and
signal level. In addition, the neighboring cell on a chain is selected to improve the reliability.
TA handover: The timing advance can be used as a standard to limit the cell coverage to
some extent. The BSC determines whether the TA value of the current MS exceeds the timing
advance limit (TALIM). If the TALIM is exceeded, the BSC initiates an emergency handover
with the cause value being great TA value. The TA value ranges from 0 to 63. The step of each
bit corresponds to the distance from the MS to the BTS, which is 553.5 m. The TA value 63
corresponds to a distance of 35 km. If the serving cell meets the conditions to trigger a TA
emergency handover, penalty is performed on the originating cell after a successful to prevent
a handover back to this cell due to other causes. The TA handover algorithm has been
optimized to meet the special requirements of the extended cells.
Quick level drop handover: This handover is responsive to the signals with rapid signal level
drop. The average value filtering and P/N decision methods are used in edge handover and
PBGT handover, and therefore the time for measurement and decision is prolonged.
Therefore, these handovers are not sensitive to rapid level drop in a short period. Therefore,
concerning the rapid level drop, you can perform finite impact response (FIR) filtering on the
original receive level. This filtering method is responsive to the rapid level drop based on the
drop slope of the original receive level.
When the quick level drop handover is triggered, the selected target cell should have the
highest priority based on the ranking in the preprocessing. If the candidate GSM cells do not
meet the handover conditions and there are neighboring 3G cells available, the inter-RAT
handover is performed if allowed. Otherwise, the algorithm determines to perform the
emergency handover of other types.
Edge handover: Edge handover is a type of rescue handover based on the signal level. To
trigger an edge handover, the receive level of the target cell should be at least one hysteresis
value (hysteresis of inter-cell handover) higher than the receive level of the serving cell.
When the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the edge handover threshold and the
P/N criterion is met within a period of measurement time, the edge handover is triggered for
the MS to maintain proper communication quality.
Bad quality handover: The transmission quality of the link is measured in bit error ratio
(BER). The BSC determines the quality of a radio link based on the quality level in the MR.
There are eight quality levels ranging from 0 to 7. Level 0 is the best and level 7 is the worst.
Bad quality level may be resulted from low signal power or channel interference. When the
receive quality of the serving cell is lower than the BQ handover threshold, the BSC starts the
handover algorithm for the MS to maintain proper communication quality. This procedure is
called BQ handover. If the serving cell meets the conditions to trigger the bad quality
handover, penalty is performed on the originating cell after a successful handover to prevent a
handover back to the cell due to other causes.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
33
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Interference handover: When the receive level of the serving cell is good, the network starts
the interference handover for the MS to maintain proper communication quality if the receive
quality deteriorates to a certain degree. If interference handover is triggered, the quality of the
channel in the serving cell is affected to some extent. Conversation, however, can be
maintained. At the same time, the receive level of the serving cell is relatively high and other
channel in the serving cell may be affected to some extent. Therefore, the intra-cell handover
is recommended.
PBGT handover: PBGT handover is also referred to as better cell handover. The PBGT
handover is based on the path loss. In PBGT handover, the system searches in real-time for a
cell with less path loss and in compliance with the system requirements. Then, the BSC
determines whether a handover is required. Compared with other handover algorithms, the
PBGT handover is triggered on the basis of path loss instead of receive level.
Hierarchical handover: The radio systems with the same coverage can be divided into four
layers. The highest layer, also the fourth layer, is the umbrella-shaped GSM900 cell with wide
coverage. This GSM900 cell implements the coverage and the connection of the fast-moving
MS. The third layer is composed of GSM900 macro cells. These are the most widely used
cells of the current system. Most of the MSs camp on this layer. The second layer is composed
of DCS1800 micro cells with smaller coverage. The DCS1800 cell is also the target cell for
capacity expansion aiming at solving the problem of insufficient frequency resources. The
bottom layer is composed of DCS1800 pico cells, which aims to meet the requirements of the
hot spot or the blind spot. The cell at the lower layer has a higher priority than the cell at the
higher layer.
Inter-layer handover: This handover is performed between different layers or between
different hierarchies at the same layer. The inter-layer handover is not performed between
cells at the same layer and the same hierarchy. If the following situations occur in a layered
and hierarchical network:
A cell with a higher priority exists.
The cell meets the conditions to trigger the hierarchical handover. That is, the signal
level of a neighboring cell is higher than the sum of inter-layer handover threshold and
hysteresis.
The P/N criterion is met. That is, within period P, the conditions to trigger the handover
are met for period N.
Then, the call is handed over to the cell with a higher priority even if the serving cell can
provide good services. The purpose of hierarchical handover is to direct the traffic of the MS
to the cell with a higher priority so that the traffic can be distributed more properly.
During the call, the hierarchical handover flexibly adjusts the traffic distribution between
different layers to meet the requirements of various networking modes.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
After being decoupled from Huawei handover II, handover between full-rate and halfrate TCHs can be enabled when Huawei handover I is used. Handovers between full-rate
and half-rate TCHs include RQI-based handovers and capacity- and quality-based
handovers. RQI is short for radio quality indicator.
A handover penalty inheritance mechanism is provided for load handovers. A successful
load handover prevents ping pong handovers and ensures that the penalty cell list of the
source cell is inherited.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
34
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report or GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of
Measurement Report

GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover
1.3.6 GBFD-110607 Direct Retry

Availability
Summary
Directed retry is a special type of handover. That is, during the assignment procedure, the
BSC initiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if no TCH is
available or the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the call access failure due to TCH congestion in the serving
cell, and hence increases the access success rate.
This feature can balance the traffic load between different cells, and hence avoids the
traffic load imbalance among cells.
Description
When the MS initiates a call, the BSC determines the assignment procedure that is to be used
according to the load of the current cell if the BSC receives an ASSIGN REQ message from
the MSC. There are three types of assignment procedures: normal assignment procedure,
mode modification procedure, and directed retry procedure. If the load of the cell is so high
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
35
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
that the cell does not admit a new service or that a newly admitted service will affect the
existing services, the BSC determines to perform a directed retry. The directed retry procedure
is as follows:
The BSC sends a CHAN ACTIV message to the target cell.
After receiving a CHAN ACTIV ACK message, the BSC requests circuit service resources.
After the requested resources are allocated successfully, the BSC sends an HO CMD to the
MS through the originating cell.
The MS sends an HO ACC message in the target cell to attempt to access the network. The
BTS sends an HO DETECT message to notify the BSC of the request and sends the PHY
INFO message to the MS.
The MS accesses the network through the FIRST SABM frame. Then, the BTS sends an EST
IND message and a UA frame to the MS for acknowledgment.
The MS sends an HO CMP message to the BSC through the target cell. Then, the BSC sends
an ASS CMP message to the MSC to process signaling in other assignment procedures. The
mobile originated procedure is complete.
Based on the homing BSC and MSC of the serving cell and target cell, the directed retry can
be classified into these types: intra-BSC directed retry, inter-BSC directed retry, and interMSC directed retry. The directed retry helps reduce the call access failures due to TCH
congestion in the serving cell, increase the access success rate, and improve the network
quality.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover or GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
36
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.3.7 GBFD-110608 SDCCH Handover

Availability
Summary
SDCCH handover refers to the handover from one SDCCH to another SDCCH in the
immediate assignment procedure.
Benefits
This feature helps improve the access success rate of MSs on the edge of the network.
Description
The SDCCH handover refers to the handover from one SDCCH to another SDCCH. This
feature helps improve the access success rate of MSs on the edge of the network, improving
the network quality.
The handover decision in SDCCH status is the same as that in TCH status. That is, the TA
handover, interference handover, BQ handover, signal level rapid fall handover, and edge
handover are allowed, and the load handover, PBGT handover, concentric handover, and
AMR handover are not allowed. In addition, the parameter used for handover decision in
SDCCH status is the same as that used for handover decision in TCH status.
Generally, the time for seizing the SDCCH is short, and therefore the SDCCH handover
seldom occurs. To prevent unnecessary handovers due to inaccurate MR in the initial phase of
call setup, the minimum time to start the SDCCH handover can be configured to control the
handover rate of the signaling channel.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Other NEs
Copyright Huawei
37
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA

NA
1.3.8 GBFD-110401 Basic Cell Selection

Availability
Summary
When the MS is powered on or moves from a blind spot to a coverage area, the MS searches
for all frequencies that the PLMN allows and selects a proper cell to camp on. This procedure
is called cell selection.
Benefits
This feature facilitates the automatic selection of the network on the MS and avoids the
complexity of manual operations.
Description
The cell selection involves two scenarios:
The MS does not store any information about the BCCH TRX.
The MS sets a search frequency band first. When the MS is tuned to the frequency with
the highest level, it decides whether this frequency is the BCCH TRX. If it is the BCCH
TRX, the MS tries to decode the SCH to synchronize with this frequency and read the
BCCH system broadcast messages. The MS camps on this cell if the MS can decode the
BCCH data correctly and confirms that this cell belongs to the selected PLMN,
parameter C1 exceeds 0, and that the access to this cell is not denied. Otherwise, the MS
is tuned to the frequency with the second highest level and repeats the decoding and data
verification procedures until the MS finds the available cell.
The MS stores the information about the BCCH frequency.

The MS searches for the stored BCCH frequency first. If the MS can decode the BCCH
data of the cell but cannot camp on this cell, it checks the BA (BCCH) list. If none of the
BCCH frequency in the list is suitable, the MS initiates the cell selection procedure
without the BCCH message mentioned earlier.
Whether an MS can select a cell to camp on is also influenced by the following factors:
Two parameters in system information 1

Cell bar access (CBA): It indicates whether a cell allows access of an MS. Cell bar
access is a one-bit code: Value 0 indicates that the access is allowed, and value 1
indicates that the access is not allowed. This parameter does not influence the access of
MSs that are handed over to the cell.
Access control (AC): It can be graded from level 0 to level 9 and from level 11 to level
15. Usually each GSM subscriber has an access level and each level is represented by
one bit: Value 1 indicates that the current cell does not allow the access of the MS with
the corresponding level value. Otherwise, the access is allowed. Subscribers with level
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
38
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
11 to level 15 have higher priority over subscribers with level 0 to level 9 in access, but
there is no priority difference within level 11 to level 15 or within level 0 to level 9.
The minimum receive level allowed in system information 3:

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: It is the signal level threshold represented by a 6-bit code. The
range 0 to 63 corresponds to the level value range -C110 dBm to -C47 dBm.
Access parameter CBQ in system information 4

Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ): It is a one-bit code. CBQ and CBA together indicate the priority
status of the cell. For details, see following table.
CBQ
CBA
Priority Status
of Cell
Selection
Cell
Reselection
Status
Normal
Normal
Barred
Barred
Low
Normal
Low
Normal
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
39
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.3.9 GBFD-110402 Basic Cell Re-selection

Availability
Summary
The MS in idle mode reselects the cell based on the trigger condition to find a cell that can
provide better services. This procedure is called cell reselection.
Benefits
The MS is always bound to a relatively good cell to obtain better service quality.
Description
The MS in idle mode periodically measures the receive level of the downlink BCCH TRX of
the serving cell and that of all downlink BCCH TRX in the BA list indicated by the BCCH
system information. Based on the corresponding algorithm, the MS then calculates the C2
value and determines whether to select a new serving cell. The MS periodically reselect cells
based on the cell reselection algorithm. In this way, the MS can find a cell that can provide
better service. This feature enables the MS to bind to a relatively good cell to obtain better
service quality.
The cell reselection of the MS is based on the BA list provided in the system broadcast
information about the serving cell. The GSM network has two BA lists. One is transmitted in
the system information on the BCCH, used for cell selection and reselection of MSs in idle
mode. The other is transmitted in the system information on the SACCH, used to inform the
MS about which BCCH TRX is used for handover monitoring in dedicated mode.
The MS triggers the cell reselection procedure in any one of the following scenarios (if the C2
algorithm is not activated, that is, C2 = C1):
The C2 value of a cell (belonging to the same location area as the current cell) exceeds
the C2 value of the current cell for five consecutive seconds.
The C1 value of a cell (belonging to a location area different from that of the current
cell) exceeds the sum of the C2 value of the current serving cell and cell selection
hysteresis value for five consecutive seconds.
The current serving cell is barred.
The MS detects a downlink failure.
The C1 value of the serving cell is less than 0 for five consecutive seconds.
The access attempt fails after the number of retransmissions exceeds the maximum one
during the random access of the MS.
The following parameter in system information 4 determines whether to activate the C2

calculation:
PI (Cell Reselect Parameters Indication) indicates whether the MS uses C2 as cell reselection
parameter and whether the parameters related to the C2 formula exist. It is a one-bit code: 0
indicates that the MS uses C1 as the cell reselection parameter; 1 indicates that the MS uses
C2 retrieved from the system information as the cell reselection parameter.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
40
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.4 Connection Management

1.4.1 GBFD-110501 Call Control
Availability
Summary
By performing the call control procedure, the BSS provides required radio resources and
terrestrial circuit to the call so that the CN can complete the call connection procedure.
Benefits
Call control is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports MOC, MTC, and emergency call. By using resource management
algorithms and control functions, the BSC provides the transmission channel for the call
control signaling between the MS and the MSC by establishing the RR connection. In the call
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
41
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
control, the BSS handles the call requests by priorities. For example, the emergency call takes
precedence over common calls, and therefore the BSS preferentially allocate the required
resources to the emergency call. For the BSC, the call control mainly involves the radio
channel allocation, A interface resource allocation with the coordination of MSC, and TCH
release. The following call procedures are supported:
MOC
MTC
Emergency call
MS-originated call release
Network-originated call release
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.4.2 GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate

Assignment
Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
42
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
Immediate assignment and assignment are two important procedures during the call setup. By
performing the immediate assignment procedure, the MS can establish an RR connection with
the network. By performing the assignment procedure, the network assigns TCHs to the MS.
In this way, a stable service connection is established between the network and the MS.
Benefits
Immediate assignment and assignment are basic features for the operators to provide the CS
speech services. Excellent immediate assignment and assignment algorithms ensure relatively
high KPIs, and therefore improves the radio network performance.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports the immediate assignment procedure, immediate assignment
combination, and corresponding assignment procedure specified in GSM specifications.
The purpose of the immediate assignment is to establish the RR connection between the MS
and the network.
By performing the assignment procedure, the BSS assigns the TCH to the MS. The
assignment is classified into early assignment for MOC, late assignment for MOC, very early
assignment for MOC, early assignment for MTC, late assignment for MTC, and very early
assignment for MTC.
Immediate assignment
The immediate assignment procedure is initiated every time the MS responds to the
paging request or the MS initiates a service request. The purpose of the immediate
assignment is to establish the RR connection between the MS and the network. In the
immediate assignment procedure, the MS sends a CHANNEL REQUEST message on
the random access channel (RACH). The network then responds with an IMMEDIATE
ASSIGNMENT message to instruct the MS to access the network on the dedicated
channel. This channel can be a stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH) or a
TCH. Huawei BSC supports cell-level SDCCH immediate assignment and TCH
immediate assignment.
Immediate assignment combination

Each immediate assignment from the BSC on the Abis interface includes the response
for only one MS's channel request message. The response messages for channel request
on the Um interface, however, are of three types: immediate assignment, immediate
assignment extended and immediate assignment reject. One immediate assignment
extended may include the responses for two immediate assignment messages and one
immediate assignment reject may include the immediate assignment commands (reject
type) for a maximum of four MSs. To improve the processing efficiency on the Um
interface, the BTS encapsulates as many immediate assignment commands as possible
into one immediate assignment extended message or immediate assignment reject
message on the Um interface and sends it to the MS. This type of processing method is
called immediate assignment combination.
Early assignment for MOC

Early assignment for MOC is a procedure in which the MOC is assigned a TCH before
the call is established. After the immediate assignment is complete, the network sends
the assignment command to the MS, requesting the calling party to seize the TCH even if
the Altering message is not received. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the
network.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
43
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Late assignment for MOC

In terms of signaling, the network sends the assignment command to the MS only after
the Alerting message from the called party is received, requesting the calling party to
seize the TCH. In this case, the ring tone is generated by the MS because no TCH is
available before the connection is established.
Very early assignment for MOC

The very early assignment for MOC is a procedure in which the TCH instead of the
SDCCH is assigned to the calling party during the immediate assignment phase. This
function increases the service access speed. The system performs the authentication,
ciphering, other signaling exchanges, and subsequent call connection procedures on the
TCH. After receiving the ASS REQ message from the network, the BSS changes the
TCH used for signaling exchanges to a real TCH by using the Mode Modify command.
Early assignment for MTC

Early assignment for MTC is a procedure in which the MTC is assigned a TCH before
the call is established. In terms of signaling, the MTC establishment is triggered when
the Paging Request message from the network is received. After the immediate
assignment is complete, the network sends the assignment command to the MS,
requesting the called party to seize the TCH even if the Altering message is not received.
In this case, the ring tone is generated by the network.
Late assignment for MTC

In terms of signaling, the network sends the assignment command to the MS only after
the Alerting message is received, requesting the called party to seize the TCH. In this
case, the ring tone is generated by the MS because no TCH is available before the
connection is established.
Very early assignment for MTC

The very early assignment for MTC is a procedure in which the TCH instead of the
SDCCH is assigned to the called party during the immediate assignment phase. This
function increases the service access speed. The system performs the authentication,
ciphering, other signaling exchanges, and subsequent call connection procedures on the
TCH. After receiving the ASS REQ message from the network, the BSS changes the
TCH used for signaling exchanges to a real TCH by using the Mode Modify command.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
CN
Copyright Huawei
44
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.4.3 GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment

Availability
Summary
When the MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment
procedure can be used to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can
proceed.
Benefits
The call is reestablished quickly after a call drop caused by the radio link failure. This
mechanism shortens the call intermission, and therefore improves the user experience.
Description
Call reestablishment is a procedure for connection recovery after the MS encounters a radio
link failure during the call. Call reestablishment may occur in a new cell or new location area.
The initiation of the call reestablishment attempt depends on the call status and whether the
cell allows call reestablishment.
After detecting a radio link failure, the BTS sends a radio link failure message to the BSC.
The BSC then releases the corresponding radio resource and waits for the MS to initiate the
call reestablishment.
After detecting a radio link failure, the MS sends a Channel Request message for call
reestablishment) in the selected cell (the original cell or a new cell) to the BSS. The BSS then
initiates and completes the immediate assignment procedure. After the immediate assignment
is complete, the MS sends a call reestablishment request to the MSC.
The MSC initiates the encryption and assignment procedures. The call establishment is almost
complete. The MSC sends a status query message to the MS to confirm whether the call status
or attach status matches the status information stored on the MSC. The MS sends the MSC a
status message to report the call status or attach status. The call reestablishment is complete.
During the call reestablishment, the MS cannot return to the idle mode. Therefore, when the
MS selects a cell in a different location area as the target cell for call reestablishment, the
location update procedure cannot be performed until this call terminates.
The MSC controls the call reestablishment procedure, and the BSC is responsible for the
channel establishment and layer 3 message forwarding. Other processing is not required.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
45
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
The MSC must support this feature.
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.4.4 GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment

Availability
Summary
The TCH re-assignment refers to that the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS after a TCH
assignment fails.
Benefits
Minimizes the impact on the call continuity caused by the TRX channel fault, and
therefore ensures a successful first dialing.
Greatly reduces the assignment failures caused by the frequency interference in a cell,
and therefore minimizes the impact on the call continuity and improve the service
quality.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
46
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
During a call, the BSC assigns a TCH to the MS after receiving an assignment request
message from the MSC. Then, the assignment command is issued to the MS on the Um
interface. If the TCH assignment fails because of various causes such as the co-channel
interference, the BSC re-assigns another TCH to the MS instead of sending an assignment
failure message to the MSC. If the TCH re-assignment is successful, the BSC sends a message
to the MSC, indicating that the assignment is complete; otherwise, the BSC sends a message
to the MSC, indicating that the assignment fails.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.4.5 GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over

by the BTS
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the immediate assignment of packets and the uplink assignment of packets
are performed by the BTS instead of the BSC. The BSC pre-allocates the radio resources in
the uplink to the BTS so that the BTS completes the uplink TBF establishment and resource
scheduling in advance.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
47
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Benefits
Moving immediate assignment of packets to the BTS can increase the initial access rate
of the PS services and therefore improves end user experience.
Moving uplink assignment of packets to BTS can improve the performance of the TCP
application such as the FTP downloading by optimizing the rate of sending the TCP
ACK message in the downlink, enhancing the user experience.
Moving immediate assignment of packets to BTS
Description
Moving immediate assignment of packets to BTS is an optimization of the uplink
immediate assignment.
Generally, after the MS sends the Packet Channel Request message, the BTS forwards
the message to the BSC to perform the immediate assignment.
To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSC can pre-allocate the uplink TBF resources
after the BTS is initialized and then sends the resource information to the BTS. When the
MS sends the Packet Channel Request message, the BTS uses the resource information
to immediately assign a channel and establish the uplink TBF for the MS. In this manner,
the MS can begin to send data blocks after receiving the immediate assignment message.
Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the BSC that the MS already accesses the specified channel
and the BSC should be responsible for the subsequent scheduling of the radio resources.
Moving uplink assignment of packets to BTS

During the downlink transmission process, if there is data to be transmitted in the uplink,
the uplink channel request information is carried in the PACKET DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK message to request the uplink TBF establishment. Generally, the MS must
wait for the BTS to forward the channel request information to the BSC to implement the
channel assignment.
To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSC can pre-allocate the uplink TBF resources
after the BTS is initialized and then sends the resource information to the BTS. When
receiving the channel request of the MS, the BTS uses the resource information to
immediately assign a channel and establish the uplink TBF for the MS. In this manner,
the MS can begin to send data blocks after receiving the immediate assignment message.
Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the BSC that the MS already establishes the uplink TBF
and the BSC should be responsible for the subsequent scheduling of radio resources. As
a result, the time for the interaction between the BTS and the BSC is saved during the
access of the MS.
This feature significantly reduces uplink access delay in TDM transmission mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
A built-in PCU, a packet-service processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Copyright Huawei
48
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
RRU3929/RRU3926/RRU3936/RRU3942/MRFUe/MRFUd do not support this feature.

The DRFU, RRU3004, RRU3908/RRU3008 V1 do not support this feature since
GBSS9.0.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
GBTS(UMPT) does not support this feature.
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

GBFD-119507 PS Downlink DTX
1.5 Radio Resource Management

1.5.1 GBFD-111001 TRX Management
Availability
Summary
TRX management involves four procedures about the TRX to support the signaling flow on
the control plane of layer 3.
Benefits
TRX management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services. This
feature enables the management of the error reporting, flow control, and radio resources of the
TRX such as SACCH resources.
In Huawei GBSS, this feature can be implemented completely on the BSC side. Therefore, the
management operations on the BTS are avoided, O&M is simplified, O&M expenditure is
reduced, and thereby O&M efficiency is improved.
Description
To enable the Abis interface to support the signaling flow on the control plane of layer 3
specified by 3GPP TS 44.018/3GPP TS 24.008, a set of TRX-level service management
procedures are provided. This set of procedures is referred to as TRX management.
Procedures involved in the TRX management are all completed at the BTS or BSC without
being directed to the core network elements. The procedures are as follows:
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
SACCH filling information modification procedure

Copyright Huawei
49
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The BSC informs the BTS of the new system information used on all downlink SACCHs
so that the BTS can instruct the MS to initiate the system information updating
procedure.
Radio resource indication procedure

The BTS informs the BSC of the interference level on the idle dedicated channels of
each TRX. Therefore, the BSC is completely informed of the interference level of the
current idle channels to facilitate subsequent channel assignments.
Flow control procedure

The frame unit controller (FUC) on a TRX informs the BSC of the TRX overload due to
CCCH overload, AGCH overload, or TRX processor overload.
Error reporting procedure

The BTS informs the BSC of the detected downlink errors that cannot be reported by
other procedures.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.5.2 GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
50
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
Radio link management involves not only the establishment and release of radio links but also
the transfer of layer 3 messages.
Benefits
Radio link management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS speech services.
This feature involves the establishment and release of radio links, the transfer of layer 3
messages, and the real-time monitoring of radio links, and therefore facilitates the basic radio
link management.
Description
Radio link management, mainly used for the establishment and release of radio links and the
message forwarding, manages the data link layer. In the procedures in the radio link
management, the BTS and the BSC can perform channel status management, initial service
establishment and service release. The procedures involved in the radio link management are
as follows:
Link establishment and release procedures

Link establishment indication: In this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that the
multi-frame link has been established. The BSC establishes an SCCP link to the MSC
according to this indication procedure.
Link establishment request: In this procedure, the BSC requests to establish a multiframe link on the radio path.
Link release indication: In this procedure, The BTS informs the BSC that the radio link
release initiated by the MS is complete.
Link release request: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to release a radio link.
Transparent transmission of layer 3 messages

Transmission of a transparent layer 3 message in acknowledged mode: In this procedure,
the BSC instructs the BTS to forward a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface
in acknowledged mode.
Reception of a transparent layer 3 message in acknowledged mode: In this procedure, the
BTS informs the BSC that a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface is received
in acknowledged mode.
Transmission of a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode: In this
procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to forward a transparent layer 3 message in
unacknowledged mode.
Reception of a transparent layer 3 message in unacknowledged mode: In this procedure,
the BTS informs the BSC that a transparent layer 3 message on the Um interface is
received in unacknowledged mode.
Notification and handling of the link fault

Link error indication: In this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC of the errors on the
radio link layer.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
51
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.5.3 GBFD-111003 Radio Common Channel

Management
Availability
Summary
Radio common channel management involves the management of common control channels
such as PCH, RACH, AGCH, NCH, PPCH, PRACH, and PAGCH.
Benefits
Radio common channel management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS
speech services.
Description
Common control channels

Common control channels include PCH, RACH, AGCH, NCH, PPCH, PRACH, and
PAGCH.
Paging Channel (PCH): Downlink channel. The MS listens to the PCH at intervals to
determine whether there is a call request from the MSC.
RACH: Uplink channel: The MS accesses the network through the RACH and requests
the network to assign an SDCCH.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
52
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Access Grant Channel (AGCH): Downlink channel. The network informs the MS of the
assigned dedicated channel (SDCCH or TCH) on the AGCH.
Notification Channel (NCH): Downlink channel, used for voice group call service
(VGCS) and voice broadcast service (VBS).
Packet Paging Channel (PPCH): Downlink channel. The MS listens to the PPCH at
intervals to determine whether there is a packet call to the MS from the SGSN.
Packet Random Access Channel (PRACH): Uplink channel. The MS requests for
network access on the PRACH.
Packet Access Grant Channel (PAGCH): Downlink channel. The network informs the
MS of the assigned packet data service channel on the PAGCH.
Radio common channel management

The radio common channel management procedures involve the signaling procedures of
MS access and assignment, and also the resource management of the common channel.
The involved procedures are as follows:
Channel request by MS: This procedure is triggered when the TRX detects a random
access request (channel request message) from the MS.
Paging: This procedure is used to page an MS on a paging sub-channel. It is used for the
MOC and initiated by the MSC through the BSC. The BSC determines the paging group
to be used according to the IMSI of the called MS. The values of this paging group are
sent to the BTS along with the identity information of the MS.
Immediate assignment: When the MS first accesses the BTS, the BSC assigns a
dedicated channel for the MS immediately in this procedure.
CCCH load indication: The BTS informs the BSC of the load information on a CCCH
timeslot. If this load exceeds the load limit predefined in the system, the BTS sends the
CCCH overload indication to the BSC periodically.
Delete indication: In this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that one immediate
assignment message is deleted without being put in the AGCH queue due to AGCH
overload. To do this, the BTS sends a Delete indication message to the BSC.
Broadcast information modification: The BSC informs the BTS of the new information
to broadcast on the BCCH. To do this, the BSC sends a BCCH information message to
the BTS.
Short message cell broadcast: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to send the
cell broadcast short message.
VGCS establishment notification: On receiving the VGCS ASSIG REQ message from
the CN, the BSC establishes a VGCS channel immediately or later based on the strategy
information in the VGCS ASSIG REQ message. Then, the BSC sends the Notification
information to the BTS. The BTS then sends this information to the MS. On receiving
this information, the MS responds to the information accordingly.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
53
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.5.4 GBFD-111004 Radio Dedicated Channel

Management
Availability
Summary
Radio dedicated channel management involves the assignment, activation, release,
management, and reporting of the dedicated channels such as SDCCH, SACCH, and TCH.
Benefits
Radio dedicated channel management is a basic feature for the operators to provide the CS
speech services.
Description
Radio dedicated channel management involves the assignment, activation, release,
management, and reporting of the dedicated channels such as SDCCH, SACCH, and TCH.
The involved procedures are as follows:
Channel activation: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to activate a dedicated
channel for an MS. After this channel is activated, the BSC assigns this channel to the MS
through the Immediate Assign, Assign Command, Additional Assign or Handover Command
message.
Channel mode modification: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to change the mode
of an activated channel.
Handover detection: This procedure is used to detect the access of the switched MS between
the target BTS and the target BSC.
Start of encryption: This procedure is used to initiate the encryption procedure specified by
GSM TS 04.08.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
54
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Measurement reporting: This procedure consists of the mandatory basic measurement

reporting procedure and the optional measurement reporting procedure with pre-processing.
In these two procedures, the BTS reports to the BSC all the parameters related to handover
decision.
SACCH deactivation: In this procedure, the BSC deactivates the related SACCH of a TRX
according to the requirement of the channel release procedure specified by GSM TS 04.08.
Radio channel release: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to release a radio channel
that is not in use.
MS power control: In this procedure, the BSS controls the transmit power of the MS related
to an activated channel. The MS power control decision should be implemented on the BSC
or BTS.
BTS transmit power control: In this procedure, the BSS controls the transmit power of the
activated channel on the TRX. BSS transmit power control should be implemented on the
BSC or BTS.
Connection failure: In this procedure, the BTS informs the BSC that an activated dedicated
channel is disconnected.
SACCH information modification: In this procedure, the BSC instructs the BTS to change the
filling information (system information) on an SACCH.
Talker detection: During a VGCS call, on receiving the Talker uplink access from the MS on
the idle uplink VGCS channel, the BTS constructs the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message on
the activated dedicated channel and reports to the BSC the detected Access delay received
from the MS.
Listener detection: When there is no listener in the cell, the dedicated radio downlink channel
allocated to the VGCS/VBS should be released timely to improve the resource utilization. The
BSC periodically broadcasts the Uplink free message in the cell. After all the listeners receive
this message, a Talker uplink access message is sent to the BTS on the idle uplink VGCS
channel. The BTS constructs the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message on the activated dedicated
channel and sends a listener detection message to the BSC. The BTS uses this message to
inform the BSC of the Access delay detected on the MS.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
CN
Copyright Huawei
55
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.5.5 GBFD-111005 Enhanced Channel Assignment

Algorithm
Availability
Summary
Enhanced channel assignment algorithm is adopted to allocate the optimum channel based on
various factors.
Benefits
By taking into account of various factors, this feature enables the BSS to allocate the optimum
channel to each call, and hence ensures better voice quality for subscribers.
This feature enables the BSS to provide as many services as possible by using limited channel
resources, maximizing the service capacity of the network.
Description
Channel assignment priorities:

Enhanced channel assignment algorithm is adopted for the selection of an optimum
channel. Each channel is assigned with a priority level. The channel of lower priority
level is less likely to be allocated than the channel of higher priority level.
Enhanced channel assignment algorithm provides four types of priority levels: capacity,
quality, PS coordination, and management. The four types of priorities work together and
form the overall priority of each radio channel. A higher overall priority value indicates a
higher priority level and an earlier assignment of the radio resource accordingly. Four
factors are considered in determining the priority level: capacity, quality, PS
coordination, and management. The priority level has the following sub-priorities:
frequency band, data rate, concentric cell, AMR, interference, seizure record, number of
PDCHs, and TRX.
Channel assignment principles

Channel assignment based on interference: The channels with less interference should be
preferentially assigned except in the following situations: One situation is that for the
high priority calls or subscribers, the MSC should prevent the assignment of channels
whose interference exceeds a predefined interference threshold. Another situation is that
to improve the call completion rate and voice quality, the calls with better receive level
should be assigned relatively high-interference channels and those with worse receive
level should be assigned relatively low-interference channels, taken into account the
maximum transmit power of the MS and the path loss in a certain call environment.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
56
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Channel assignment based on channel configuration: Take into account factors such as
whether the channel and BCCH belong to the same TRX. Channel assignment based on
channel configuration helps reduce the network interference and hence improve the
network quality.
Channel assignment based on history record: This algorithm has the memory function.
The history record consists of the information on successful and failed channel seizures
and on the call drops during the seizures. In addition, the BSC needs to determine
whether a failed seizure and a call drop during a seizure are caused by radio channel
faults. Such history records provide reliable basis for the current channel assignment.
Channel assignment based on load balance: This mechanism facilitates the even
distribution of channel seizures on different TRXs. This not only reduces the co-channel
and adjacent-channel interference but also prevents the situation wherein a large number
of calls are carried on certain TRXs.
Channel assignment based on specific calls: Specific calls such as intra-cell handover
and concentric cell handover have special channel assignment strategies. The intra-cell
handovers are mainly triggered by factors related to channel quality. Therefore, the
frequency of the TRX that carries the original channel is likely to be interfered. If the
original channel is in frequency hopping mode, certain frequencies in the frequency
hopping group are likely to be interfered to a great extent. Therefore, a channel of a
different TRX or a different frequency hopping group as the original channel should be
allocated for the intra-cell handover.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Preferentially allocating channels on BCCH carrier for non-AMR speech services:
Generally, in a tight frequency reuse network, loose frequency reuse pattern, such as 4 x
3 mode, is applied to the BCCH TRX; tight frequency reuse pattern, such as 1 x 3 mode,
is applied to the TCH TRX. The non-AMR speech (including FR, EFR, and HR) is more
sensitive to interference than the AMR speech. Therefore, if the network supports the
AMR speech, adhere to the following principles in channel assignment: For MSs that do
not support AMR speeches, preferentially allocate the channels on the carriers in loose
frequency reuse pattern, such as the BCCH carrier. For MSs that support the AMR
speech, allocate the channels on the carriers in tight frequency reuse pattern to improve
the overall voice quality in the network.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
57
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.6 Operation and Maintenance

1.6.1 MRFD-210301 Configuration Management
Availability
This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1 and RAN2.0.
Summary
This feature provides operators with the method for collecting and managing the information
about NEs (MBSC and MBTS). It can control the links between the NEs. The graphic user
interface (GUI) makes it easy for configuration management.
Benefits
This feature provides a descriptive overview of the status of the network and supports fast
installation, capacity expansion, and data configuration of the network.
Description
This feature provides operators with the method for collecting and managing the information
about NEs (MBSC and MBTS). It can control the links between the NEs. The graphic user
interface (GUI) makes it easy for configuration management.
The NE configuration can be classified into five levels:
1.
Initial configuration
Design the initial configuration of the MBSC and MBTS.
2.
Basic site configuration

Configuration of the O&M communication between the MBSC, MBTS, and the U2000
3.
External site hardware configuration on the MBTS side

Configuration of TMA data and antennas
4.
MBTS configuration and site-specific configuration on the MBTS side

Data configuration of the A/Iu interface, Abis/Iub interface, Iur-g/Iur interface, and the
transport network
5.
Cell/TRX configuration on the MBSC side
Data configuration of cells, channels, and neighboring cells
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
58
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Configuration from level 1 to level 3 can be implemented either with the GUI of the
configuration tool or with the pre-defined configuration files on the LMT. Configuration of
level 4 and level 5 can be implemented either using the U2000 or using the configuration tool.
Online/Offline data configuration and status query

The configuration data is not sent to the host until it takes effect. This improves the
efficiency of configuring a large quantity of data. The MBSC supports offline
configuration based on host subracks. Therefore, the services are not interrupted during
capacity expansion.
During the switchover of the IP interface board and the ATM/TDM interface board,
offline configuration supports the modification of the interface board type and the
switchover of the active/standby boards.
Online data configuration enables the data to be sent to the host immediately after the
configuration. There is no need to reset the system or reload the data.
X.731 defines the object status. The operators can query the object status such as the
board status or cell status and the time of the latest status change.
Configuration right control

With the configuration right control, data can be configured only on the LMT of the
MBSC/MBTS or the U2000 client. In addition, the operators always have the
configuration right. This improves the reliability of the system.
Configuration rollback on the MBSC side

When the equipment or network malfunctions due to improper data modification,
operators can perform the rollback operation to restore the system in a short time.
MBSC data backup

Two OMUs work in active/standby mode. The system synchronizes the data on the
standby OMU with that on the active OMU.
The MBSC supports automatic backup and manual backup. It provides a data backup
and restoration tool.
Setting of network parameters

The radio network parameters are of two types: MBSC-oriented parameters and celloriented parameters, which are used in different radio conditions. The MBSC can check
the integrity and consistency of configuration data such as the data of a cell.
Detection of missing neighboring cell

Based on the measurement information from the user equipment (UE), the neighboring
cells missed for configuration can be detected and reported. This helps the operators
optimize the configuration of neighboring cells and therefore improves the network
planning efficiency.
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
Web LMT: The operation and maintenance GUI of the MBSC uses the Web LMT based
on the browser/server mode. The configuration GUI uses the CME. The MML client is
incorporated in the Web LMT and therefore the configuration and maintenance for the
MBSC can be carried out by running MML commands. After the Web LMT is used,
there is no need to install the LMT software on the local PC. The configuration and
maintenance for the MBSC can be carried out through the Web browser. In addition, the
upgrade of the software on the local PC is not required when the MBSC software is
upgraded, and therefore the operation efficiency is significantly improved.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBSS12.0
Copyright Huawei
59
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Cell Frequency Band Modification in One Key: The frequency band of a cell can be
changed by MML commands or CME reconfiguration. The new frequency band or bands
must contain the earlier frequency band of the cell. For example, change a GSM900 cell
to a GSM900/DCS1800 cell. This feature applies only to the frequency band adjustment
scenario where a single-band network is changed to a dual-band network.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
This feature is implemented by the U2000 or LMT.
NA

NA
1.6.2 MRFD-210302 Performance Management

Availability
Summary
This feature periodically takes samples of counters about the management objects, bearer
resources, and services. The sampled data is then collected, saved, monitored, and analyzed.
In this way, the operating status of the network can be obtained. Therefore, this feature helps
operators quickly locate and solve problems and optimize the network.
Benefits
This feature provides an efficient method for monitoring the network performance and
facilitates the network troubleshooting and optimization. The real-time performance
monitoring is a more effective feature.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
60
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
Performance management helps collect the measurable performance data to obtain the
network operating status, helping the operators quickly locate and solve problems and
optimize the network.
Performance measurement management
This feature provides operators with a method for managing the measurable performance data.
For the new commissioning NEs (MBSC and MBTS), the pre-defined performance statistics
completely starts after the initial start-up or restart. The performance statistics can be
suspended or restored manually.
The MBSC and MBTS provide the interfaces between them and the U2000, allowing the
U2000 to collect necessary statistic data and to configure the related parameters including
statistic counters and periods.
The statistic data is saved on the U2000 in binary-formatting files in every statistic period.
The result files are saved on the MBTS for up to 24 hours or on the MBSC for up to 10 days.
If a fault occurs in data transmission, you can obtain the lost data using the U2000.
Performance measurement counter
Performance measurement counters include key counters and other counters. Key counters are
used to generate the KPIs that are defined on the U2000, and these predefined counters are
initialized immediately after the MBSC and the MBTS start. Customized KPIs and formulas
can be added, modified, and deleted on the U2000. The counters that indicate network
performance can also be added if required.
In the UMTS network, the following measurement objects are supported:
Cell measurement
Neighboring cell measurement
Inter-RAT neighboring cell measurement
RNC overall measurement
ATM transport measurement
IP transport measurement
Standard interface measurement
NE hardware measurement
Real-time performance monitoring
This feature supports real-time performance monitoring and enables the U2000 to display the
monitoring results in charts. Therefore, it facilitates operations, such as troubleshooting, drive
test, and network optimization. For details about how to configure real-time performance
monitoring, see the U2000 online help.
Monitoring tasks are managed on the U2000 client. The monitored data is displayed in curve
and can be manually exported to a file for future use. Only data monitored within the recent
four hours can be exported.
For details about the specifications of monitoring tasks and objects to be monitored, see the U2000
performance specification guides.
The following items can be monitored in real time:
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Equipment performance: CPU usage, clock source quality, and so on.

Copyright Huawei
61
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Connection performance: SIR measurement, UE transmit power, and so on.
Cell performance: PCPICH transmit power, number of UEs in the cell, and so on.
Link performance: IMA group, UNI link, and so on.
Service performance: RF performance, UL channel scanning, and resource usage.
In the GSM network, the following performance counters are supported:

The measurements can be classified into the following types according to the measurement
object:
BSC measurement
Cell measurement
TRX measurement
Neighboring cell measurement
The measurements can be classified into the following types according to the MS status:
Paging
Call
Measurement report
Channel allocation
Enhanced performance measurement:
Measurement of incoming and outgoing cell handovers

This measurement provides data about the incoming and outgoing cell handovers. The
collected measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and
optimization.
Undefined adjacent cell measurement

This measurement provides BSIC, BCCH frequency, average signal strength, number of
MRs of adjacent cells that are included in the BA list but not included in the adjacent cell
relationship table. The collected measurement data assists the operators in network
adjustment and optimization.
Defined adjacent cell measurement

This measurement provides BSIC, BCCH frequency, average signal strength, number of
MRs of the defined adjacent cell. The collected measurement data assists the operators in
network adjustment and optimization.
Uplink and downlink balance measurement

This measurement provides the data about the balance between the uplink and downlink
of TCHs. The uplink and downlink balance level is graded according to the receive
levels in the uplink and downlink. The collected measurement data assists the operators
in network adjustment and optimization.
Call drop measurement

This measurement provides the average level and quality in the uplink and downlink, and
also the average TA value of SDCCH call drops and TCH call drops. The collected
measurement data assists the operators in network adjustment and optimization.
BTS out-of-service measurement

This measurement is provided by the performance management of the BSC together with
the U2000. This measurement provides the start time of BTS out-of-service, end time of
BTS out-of-service (or service recovery time), and the duration of BTS out-of-service.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
62
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
GBSS8.0
Supports the real-time performance monitoring and the counter measurement related to
the built-in PCU.
GBSS8.1
Supports real-time traffic measurement, enhanced IP performance measurement, and
measurement period of 24 hours. In addition, it supports the measurement of traffic
statistics of group call and group broadcast on the BSC level and cell level.
GBSS12.0
Report Speed Improvement of U2000 Northbound Interface: The speed of reporting
traffic statistics over the northbound interface of the U2000 is improved by moving the
calculation functionality of KPIs from the U2000 to the BSC. The BSC calculates the
KPIs based on the measured counters, and then sends the calculation result to the U2000.
After synchronizing its measurement period with the measurement period of the BSC,
the U2000 obtains the calculation result of the BSC. In this way, the U2000 can generate
the northbound interface KPIs in a short period of time. In ideal conditions, the U2000
can generate the northbound interface KPIs in 10 to 15 minutes after synchronizing its
measurement period with the measurement period of the BSC. The period of time
required depends on the capacity of the BSC.
GBSS14.0
Supports disuse of performance counters and object parameters. The performance
counters and object parameters to be disused will be reserved in two versions, that is, the
current version and the next version.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support enhanced IP performance measurement.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
Performance management and real-time monitoring are implemented by the U2000.
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
63
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.6.3 MRFD-210303 Inventory Management

Availability
Summary
This feature assists in reporting the information about the physical and logical objects of the
NEs to the U2000, and also assists in managing this information on the U2000.
Benefits
As a large number of devices are deployed on networks, it becomes difficult to manage
equipment. For ease of equipment management, operators need to obtain the information
about the physical device and some important logical information. With this feature, the
information can be reported to the U2000, facilitating the asset management. In addition,
operators can obtain the accurate decision-making data of the existing networks in time.
Description
The inventory management helps operators to manage the network assets and configuration
data. With this function, network assets and configuration data can be managed on the U2000.
The objects that are managed by this function include physical objects (such as rack, frame,
slot, board, and fan) and logic objects (such as cell, software, and patch).
Upon a request from the U2000, the information about the network assets and configuration
data are generated in an .xml file and then are sent to the U2000. The U2000 saves the
uploaded information in the network inventory database.
Upon a request from the U2000, the MBSC reports its information about the assets and
configuration to the U2000. In terms of the method of collecting and reporting the information
about the base station, the UMTS network is different from the GSM network.
In the UMTS network, the NodeB works as an independent NE and supports the reporting of
its inventory information to the U2000.
In the GSM network, the inventory of the BTS is jointly controlled by the BSC and the BTS.
The BTS inventory management system is deployed on the U2000. The U2000 sends the
required inventory information command to the BSC on the southbound interface. On
reception of this command, the BSC queries the inventory information about all the BTSs,
generates files, and sends the files to the U2000. Then, the U2000 interprets the files and
saves them in the database. Some inventory information can be imported by the manual input
or other files. The U2000 supports the query, synchronization, modification, export, and
import of the BTS inventory information.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
64
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
SHAPE
The BTS supports the reporting of the information about the electronic label, software
version, and hardware version of the BTS boards as well as the information about the
manufacturer of the heat exchanger. In addition, the BTS also supports the input and reporting
of the bar code of the BTS cabinet.
As the ID of a board, the electronic label provides the basis for board replacement, presents a
traceable mark in the entire lifecycle of the board, and supplies the data required for the
management, tracing, and maintenance of the board. The information about the electronic
label of the BTS board includes: the board model, bar code, BOM code, description,
production date, name of the manufacturer, and release number.
The U2000 provides the import or modification function for the inventory information that is
not supported by the BTS. That is, the information can be manually entered. The information
includes the information about the BTS antenna, electronic label of the board that fails to
report the electronic label (mainly purchased parts), and the ultimate service time of the board
information area. This information is not sent to the BTS for storage but is saved only in the
inventory management system on the U2000.
In addition, no storage part is available in the BTS cabinet, and therefore the bar code of the
cabinet needs to be manually entered on the U2000 or the LMT. The BTS supports the input
of this information and also the storage of it in the main control board of the BTS. Then, the
BTS sends the information to the BSC on the inventory management interface.
Enhancement
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBSS8.0
Copyright Huawei
65
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Supports the reporting of the electronic label of the BTS board according to electronic
label standards 3.0.
GBSS8.1
Adds the reporting of the information about the software and hardware versions of the
BTS boards, manufacturer of the heat exchanger, electronic labels of the BBU
backplane, fan board, and power monitoring board, and the input and query of the
electronic bar code of the cabinet.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
This feature is implemented by the U2000. Inventory information can be queried only on
the U2000.
NA

NA
1.6.4 MRFD-210304 Faulty Management

Availability
Summary
This feature involves various fault management functions such as system auto test, fault
detection, fault monitoring, and fault rectification of the UTRAN. This enables the operators
to learn about the network fault timely and take proper measures to avoid service interruption.
Benefits
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Enables the automatic monitoring of the network equipment.

Copyright Huawei
66
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enables the operators to learn about the actual state of the network timely and
comprehensively by querying the active alarm list and alarm log.
Facilitates the manual board test, with which the operators can identify the faulty board
timely.
Description
The fault management involves system auto test, fault detection, fault monitoring, and fault
rectification. This enables the operators to learn about the network fault timely and take
proper measures to avoid service interruption.
The automatic hardware test of the system is performed during the startup of the MBSC or
MBTS. When the MBSC or MBTS is in operation, the system status monitoring can also be
started manually if required.
Fault detection
This involves the fault detection of the physical layer, transmission link layer, and others.
The fault detection can be started manually. Operators can either browse the monitoring
result online or save the monitoring result as files.
Alarm management
Operators can browse the real-time alarm information, query the historical alarm
information, and save the alarm information as required. The online help provides
detailed methods for clearing alarms.
Alarm correlation processing

Based on certain built-in mechanism, the alarm correlation handling mechanism enables
the system to keep the most important alarms instead of all the related alarms when a
fault occurs. The number of alarms can be greatly reduced in this way and network
problems can be easily identified and handled. This mechanism is pre-defined and
incorporated in the NEs such as MBSC and MBTS. More alarm correlation processing
mechanisms can be defined by the operators on the U2000.
The operators may also filter the alarms of an object. The alarms of this object, if filtered, are
not reported.
The alarms of the access network include MBSC alarm and MBTS alarm.
MBSC alarm
The MBSC alarm system provides two types of alarm output devices: alarm console and
alarm box. The alarm box provides visual and audible alarms. The alarm console is a part of
the OMC. It provides detailed alarm information, recovery suggestion, and alarm box control.
The MBSC alarm system is composed of the BAM alarm module, centralized network
management alarm database, alarm console, and alarm box. Alarm system accurately provides
the fault information detected by the MBSC system to the maintenance personnel by sending
alarm information. The maintenance personnel can then rectify the fault accordingly.
Alarm severity
According to the severity and influence of the alarms, there are four alarm severities: critical,
major, minor, and warning. Different severity of alarms is presented in different manner, such
as color and sound.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Alarm classification

Copyright Huawei
67
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
According to its subsystem and subsystem type, alarms can be classified into fault alarm and
event alarm. Clearance alarms are provided for fault alarms. Event alarm has no
corresponding clearance alarm.
According to the cause of alarms, alarms can be classified into inter-module communication
alarm, signaling subsystem alarm, clock subsystem alarm, and power supply subsystem alarm.
These alarms help the maintenance engineers quickly locate the faults. This feature also
provides alarm about software running, such as CPU overload alarm and GBAM hard disk
capacity alarm.
Alarm location and recovery suggestions
The alarm console provides detailed alarm information, including the ID of the board for
which the alarm is generated, the potential cause and possible consequence of the alarm, and
the recovery suggestion.
Alarm box control
The alarm box control provides manual control of the alarm box. You can mute the alarm
sound or turn off the LED for the alarm box manually by related MML command. The alarms
can be printed in real time. The alarm parameters data can be configured and modified. Based
on the configuration, the MBSC can automatically control where the alarms will be sent, such
as to alarm box or to OMC alarm console. This enables flexible alarm control.
Alarm query
The alarms can be queried in various conditions. You can browse the fault alarm, emergency
event alarm, or other event alarms in real time on the alarm console. You can also query the
history fault alarm, clear alarm, and event alarm according to alarm serial number, alarm ID,
date and time of alarm, alarm module number, function number, or alarm severity. The
queried historical alarms can be saved.
Environment monitoring unit
Each subrack of the BSC6900 can connect to an environment monitoring unit (EMU) over the
serial ports. The EMU has four types of ports: fixed analog ports (four) used for receiving
-C48 V voltage, -C24 V voltage, temperature, and humidity alarms; extended external analog
ports (four); fixed external Boolean ports (four) used for receiving water, smoke, infrared, and
door status alarms; and extended external Boolean ports (32).
Alarm information is stored on the U2000. MBSC has buffer capability. A maximum of 150
thousand historical alarm records can be stored.
MBTS alarm
MBTS alarms can be queried according to the site number, cell number, or TRX number
(applicable to BTS) to confirm the failure and clearance states.
MBTS alarms can be queried and displayed on both the alarm console at the remote end and
the Site Maintenance System at the local end.
The MBTS alarm supports the input interface of the environment alarm. The environment
alarms supported by the MBTS are fire, smoke, temperature, humidity, door control, and main
supply alarms. The ranges of alarms can be controlled by alarm threshold setting on the
MBSC. The MBTS is also capable of clearing environment alarms to provide flexible
clearance of the alarms.
Enhancement
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBSS8.0
Copyright Huawei
68
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Supports the clearance of PS-related alarms, including device alarms and service alarms.
GBSS8.1
Supports suppression of the intermittent and repeated alarms, alarm correlation
processing, and enhanced alarm positioning information.
GBSS12.0
Support Alarm Restraint:
Alarm Restraint:With this function, alarms operators can monitor the network and
timely detect a fault. The number of alarms and the proper generation of alarms directly
affect the efficiency in fault rectification. To prevent the generation of a great number of
alarms, the generation of repeated alarms, and the generation of multiple alarms caused
by one fault, the alarms are suppressed on the basis of temporal correlation and spatial
correlation.
To suppress alarms based on temporal correlation, the BSC compares each generated
alarm with the related alarms generated before and after the alarm. Based on the
comparison result, the BSC determines whether to report the alarm.
To suppress alarms based on spatial correlation, the BSC correlates the alarms that must
be reported. In this way, the information about multiple alarms is displayed in one alarm.
The purpose of the preceding two measures is to integrate multiple alarms into one
alarm. In this way, the number of alarms is reduced, whereas the usability of the alarm is
increased. The system does not discard the suppressed alarms, and users can query these
alarms.
GBSS14.0
OML Identification: The BSC identifies a BTS over the Abis interface based on the
timeslot for the port where the OML of the BTS is configured. If transmission
connections to two BTSs with the same configurations, including the site type, boards,
cells, and TRXs, are reversed, the data configurations that the BSC sends to the two
BTSs are also reversed. However, no alarm is reported because these two BTSs and their
cells work properly. In this case, maintenance personnel cannot quickly identify the
incorrect transmission connections. In practice, the reversed radio parameters for cells
under these BTSs cause a decrease in the network KPIs and problems such as co-channel
interference, adjacent-channel interference, and handover failures.
The OML identification function allows the BSC to check the electronic label of a BTS
after the OML to the BTS is set up. If the BSC detects that the electronic label is
inconsistent with the configured one, the BSC does not allow the BTS to work and
reports an alarm so that maintenance personnel can quickly identify the incorrect
transmission connections.
Fast Fault Location and Service Recovery: If a service-level or network-level fault
occurs on the live network, services cannot quickly recover using common maintenance
methods, such as reset, power-off, and board replacement because the faulty NE or board
cannot be quickly located. In this condition, the Fast Fault Location and Service
Recovery function can be used to quickly locate the fault.
This function distinguishes faults by service or network and thereby provides diagnosis
rules by scenario. Specifically, this function analyzes onsite counters, alarms, and logs
according to the diagnosis rules and provides an analysis report. Based on the analysis
report, maintenance engineers can locate the faulty board or subsystem and accordingly
choose an appropriate troubleshooting measure.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
69
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not
support OML identification.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
GBTS(UMPT) does not support OML identification.
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
This feature is implemented by the U2000 (Huawei OMC) or RNC/NodeB LMT.
NA

NA
1.6.5 MRFD-210305 Security Management

Availability
Summary
This feature enhances the network security management by providing various user
authorization and management mechanisms.
Benefits
This feature provides user authorization and management mechanism, enhancing the network
security management.
Description
Security management enhances the system security in terms of the following aspects:
Facilitates user management such as the management of user accounts, user rights, and
user command groups.
Supports the backup and restore of the system data.
Adopts the Windows security policies for the IP services of the BAM to protect the
system from network attacks.
Supports the installation of Windows antivirus software such as Officescan.
Collects the database operation logs and auditing logs.
Reports corresponding alarms when network attacks are detected or the number of
unauthorized accesses exceeds the threshold.
Supports FTP over the Security Socket Layer (SSL).
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
70
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Supports SSL for the communication between the OMC and the GBSS/RAN. This
enables the encryption of all transmitted data.
Adds authority control for the binary interface between the GBSS/RAN and the OMC.
Records the information about the security logs for the binary interface between the
GBSS/RAN and the OMC.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
The U2000 must support this feature.
NA

NA
1.6.6 MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance

Availability
This feature was introduced in GBSS8.0 in the GSM and RAN 5.0 in the UMTS.
Summary
The LMT provides the topology maintenance for the distributed base station, and therefore
facilitates the maintenance operations.
Benefits
This feature provides convenient O&M functions for the distributed base station, reducing the
O&M expenditure of the operators.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
71
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
The distributed base station supports the automatic scan of the RRU topology. The LMT
provides the topology maintenance for the distributed base station. The functions that
supported by this feature are as follows:
The networking structure of the distributed base station is displayed in a visualized way.
Different colors are used to mark the status of each BBU, RRU, and CRPI link.
The BBU or RRU can be selected directly from the displayed topology for maintenance.
Figure 1.1 UMTS NodeB topology
Figure 1.2 GSM BTS topology
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
72
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.6.7 MRFD-210310 BTS/NodeB Software USB

Download
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the user or the maintenance personnel can download and activate the MBTS
software using the USB without requiring the laptop. Therefore, the MBTS can be set up
easily and quickly.
Benefits
With this feature, the software upgrade is independent of Abis/Iub transmission. Therefore,
the upgrade is shortened and the MBTS can be set up quickly with a low cost. In addition, the
maintenance personnel do not need to enter the site again because they can perform the
software commissioning remotely.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
73
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
The 3900 series MBTSs provide the USB port to download and activate the host software.
After the MBTS hardware is installed, the system automatically upgrades the software when
the USB disk is inserted.
This feature enables the software upgrade to be performed using the USB without requiring a
laptop. With this feature, the software upgrade is independent of Abis/Iub transmission.
Therefore, the upgrade is shortened and the MBTS can be set up quickly with a low cost.
After the software is activated and the system begins to operate, the hardware fault can be
detected according to the indicator on the BBU panel so that the fault is rectified in the
shortest time. In addition, the maintenance personnel do not need to enter the site again
because they can perform the software commissioning remotely.
This feature supports encryption and validity verification for configuration files in the USB
disk. With this feature, users can encrypt configuration files in the USB disk using the USB
disk encryption tool provided by the U2000, ensuring data security. The MBTS can parse
encrypted configuration files and verify the validity of these files. However, this feature does
not support encryption and parsing for software packages, but the MBTS can verify the
validity of data in these software packages.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
All configuration files in the USB disk are encrypted using the USB disk encryption tool
provided by the U2000. The files must be decrypted before being copied from the USB
disk by a board.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, and DBS3900 support this feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
The BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, and DBS3900 support this feature.
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
74
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.6.8 GBFD-111202 O&M of BTS

Availability
Summary
At the BTS OMC at the local end or the remote end, O&M can be performed for BTS logical
objects or BTS boards. The logical objects include site, cell, baseband (BT), channel (CH),
radio carrier (RC), and timeslot.
Benefits
The BTS O&M has powerful functions, facilitates and simplifies the O&M, and reduces the
O&M expenditure.
Huawei GBSS BTS O&M system provides the following benefits:
Flexible operations enable the operators to perform the O&M at either the local end or
remote end as required by the engineering or O&M.
Compared with O&M at separated sites, the O&M system provided by Huawei GBSS
reduces the manual operations and the O&M cost because Huawei GBSS supports the
centralized O&M for BTSs controlled by one BSC.
The remote O&M system helps promptly locate and solve the problem of BTS operation,
and hence reduces the operating expenditure.
Description
The BTS O&M involves the following operations: query, loading, and activation of software
version; query of site attributes; query of the usage of various resources; transmission
performance test; reset in levels; environment monitoring; alarm masking; query of ring
networking parameters.
O&M of multiple BTSs
This function reduces the work of maintenance personnel and also the possibility of improper
operations, particularly in the case of large-scale operation. Huawei GBSS supports the four
types of operations for multiple BTSs: query of fault, query of software version, forced
loading of software, and software activation.
O&M of cell
O&M of cell involves the following operations: cell attribute query, cell administrative state
change, cell system information sending, and forced cell handover. The forced cell handover
provided by the BSC refers to the forced handover with or without an assigned target cell. The
BSC selects a target cell based on the MR to ensure that the handover is successful. The
forced cell handover is used to switch the subscribers in a cell to another cell before the BTS
maintenance to ensure that no call drops occur during the BTS maintenance.
O&M of BT
O&M of BT involves the following operations: query of BT attribute, reset in levels for BT,
query and change of BT administrative state, and BT test.
O&M of CH
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
75
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
O&M of CH involves the following operations: query of CH attribute, query and change of
CH administrative state, forced CH handover, and related O&M of CH.
O&M of RC
O&M of RC involves the following operations: O&M of TRX administrative state, query of
TRX attributes, and automatic frequency calibration.
O&M of BTS involves also board-specific operations such as query, maintenance, and reset of
the BTS boards. You can select specific boards on the O&M system to query information such
as the software and hardware information, extended power information. In addition, you can
reset boards and query board alarms on the O&M system. For certain boards, you can also set
the clock. By checking the operating status displayed on the LMT, you can be fully aware of
the state of the BTS.
All O&M functions can be implemented at either the remote end or local end, facilitating the
use and query. The general maintenance or operation of the logical object can be performed at
the remote end. In the case of hardware replacement, all O&M can be performed at the local
end.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Flexible OML configuration:
In the case of fixed OML configuration, the OML must be configured on timeslot 31 of
E1 or timeslot 24 of T1. Any timeslot other than timeslot 31 on the E1 of the upper-layer
BTS is allocated to the OML of the lower-level BTSs. This type of configuration meets
the requirement in most cases but not in the case of swapping. The OML cannot be
configured for the BTS in the case of swapping where the OML of the new BTS should
be configured on the same timeslot as the existing transmission devices.
This problem can be solved by the flexible OML configuration. Before putting the BTS
into operation, configure the data on the BSC side to reserve the E1 timeslots to be used
by other transmission devices. During the configuration of OML for the BTS, the OMLs
of the BTS and its lower-level BTSs are configured on the timeslots other than those
reserved ones. In this way, the normal operation of the BTS and other transmission
devices is ensured.
GBSS13.0
IP transmission of the monitoring device: The BTS may be connected to external
monitoring device from customers. The monitoring device supports IP transmission. In
this version, vacant FE electrical port or electrical port of the BTS is connected to the IP
port of the monitoring device, providing data routing and forwarding functions for the
monitoring device. The monitoring data is reported to the PC or other maintenance
terminals through the transmission network for analysis of the monitoring information.
The BTS only provides the routing and forwarding functions and does not support the
analysis of monitoring information of customers.
Only the BTS3900/A/L/DBS3900 (GTMUb) and BTS3012 series BTSs support this
function.
GBSS14.0
Cloud BB CPRI O&M capability improvement: This function allows users to perform
CPRI BER test and query the information about optical modules on the U2000. This
improves the CPRI maintainability.
To query information about optical modules between the BBU and RRUs, right-click a
BBU or RRU and choose Display SFP Module Information from the shortcut menu.
Then, the U2000 sends an MML command for querying the optical module information
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
76
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
to the NEs, and the NEs respond with query results in MML messages. The U2000
displays these results in a list. The results include the optical module type, wavelength,
power, and port rate.
When users identify CPRI faults, they can start monitoring CPRI BER on any section of
CPRI cables to the BTS in the Signaling Trace Management window. The U2000
dynamically displays the test result in curves. This helps users remotely locate CPRI
faults.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3900B do not support
flexible OML configuration and IP transmission and IP transmission for monitoring
devices. The BTS3900E does not support IP transmission for monitoring devices. IP
transmission for monitoring devices requires a GTMUb board.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
GBTS(UMPT) does not support the flexible OML configuration.
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.6.9 GBFD-111203 O&M of BSC

Availability
Summary
Users access the NE using the LMT or U2000 to perform routine maintenance and operation
such as data configuration, alarm management, security management, performance data
collection and analysis, and loading and upgrading so that the NE functions properly.
Benefits
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
77
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Users can add, delete, modify, query the configured data, and perform various
maintenance operations for the NE so that the NE can provide services as required.
Users can monitor and learn about the operating status of the NE in real time to promptly
locate and rectify the fault.
Users can upgrade the NE at either the local end or the remote end.
Description
The graphical interface makes the O&M of BSC easy to understand and easy to use. The
O&M of BSC mainly provides the following functions:
Configuration management
The data configuration of the BSC and the BTS under the control of this BSC is
managed. The data configuration for the BSC can be performed on the LMT either
online or offline.
Software management
As an important function of the O&M system, software management involves operations
such as loading, management, and activation. The management objects include software
of each board, software patch, license, and BOOTROM. The operations of these four
types of software facilitate convenient and proper management of BSC software.
O&M of board
O&M of board involves the reset and switchover of boards, the monitoring of CPU and
DSP, and the reset of subracks or the system. Users perform different operations to solve
the problems or maintain the system in different situations.
System monitoring
System monitoring involves monitoring and offline browsing of the CPU/DSP usage. A
maximum of four objects can be monitored in a task. Multiple monitoring tasks can be
performed at the same time. Monitoring of the CPU/DSP usage enables the users to learn
about the system load in real time.
Query of call resources

Based on the anonymous IMSI or other information of a subscriber provided by the
maintenance personnel, the system queries all the resources the subscriber uses in the
GBSS. These resources include the BTS, sector, TRX, circuits on the Abis interface, Ater
interface information about the BSC, A interface information, TC resources, and board
information. All the information helps maintenance personnel quickly locate problems
and faults.
Maintenance of interface and link

Maintenance of interface and link involves the management of LAPD link, SS7 link, and
the trunk circuit on each interface. For example, query of the status of the LAPD link,
SS7 link, and trunk circuit, changing the status of trunk circuit, blocking and unblocking
of the LAPD link and SS7 link.
Time synchronization
Huawei BSC implements the time synchronization with the upper-level NMS through
BAM to complete the synchronization of all NEs managed by a centralized NMS. The
BAM distributes the synchronized clock to all the BSC boards to synchronize all the
elements of the system.
By using powerful maintenance functions, the maintenance personnel can quickly get
familiar with the BSC LMT and master the usage of Huawei equipment to maintain
Huawei GBSS in a simple and efficient way.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
78
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
E1/T1 transmission BER detection: You can obtain the information on the E1/T1
transmission quality on the maintenance system. The following information can be
viewed: BER, errored second (ES), errored second ratio (ESR), severely errored second
ratio (SESR), number of frames failed in CRC, and number of synchronization bit check
errors. The information provides the maintenance personnel with a visualized view of the
transmission quality. E1/T1 transmission BER detection complies with G.821
specifications.
Operation log reported to the centralized NMS: The BSC supports the query and export
of operation logs by time. The exported logs are saved in .xml format. The BSC
compresses the operation logs and uploads them to the centralized NMS by time or by
file size. The centralized NMS can translate the operation logs in .xml format. It also
supports the query by time.
GBSS8.0
The O&M of the built-in PCU is supported.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.6.10 GBFD-111207 BTS Test Function

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
79
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
BTS test involves site test, baseband test, baseband idle timeslot test, TCH loopback test,
transmission performance test, and cyclic redundancy check (CRC).
Benefits
One of the major problems faced by all operators is quick and easy location of the cause and
faulty module of the BTS problems.
The OMC at the remote end and local end provided by Huawei GBSS enables the BTS test
and also the centralized and remote BTS test. This facilitates the commissioning at the local
end during installation and also the centralized management through the NMS and the OMC
remotely during the O&M process. Huawei GBSS BTS test feature provides the following
benefits:
Flexible operations are supported. Operators can perform the O&M at either the local
end or remote end as required by the engineering or O&M.
Compared with fault management at separated sites, the BTS O&M system provided by
Huawei GBSS reduces the manual operations and the O&M expenditure because
Huawei GBSS supports the centralized management for BTSs under one BSC.
Various test functions help the maintenance personnel to locate the fault and identify the
faulty module without the use of test devices. This enables the automatic problem
detection and therefore saves the maintenance expenditure.
Description
Site test: In the site test, the board hardware is tested. The boards can be TMU board, TRX,
and CDU. The hardware test enables early detection and recovery of hardware failure.
Baseband test: Baseband test involves BIU loopback test and TRX self-test. In BIU loopback
test, the transmission of the TRX signaling channel on the BTS DBUS is tested. The TRX
sends the signaling channel data to the signaling channel of the BTS DBUS. After the
loopback through the TMU, the TRX receives the data sent by the TRX itself. The TRX
compares the data with the original data, and then reports the BER to obtain the link quality of
the signaling channel on the BTS DBUS. In TRX self-test, the running status of the TRX is
tested.
Baseband idle timeslot test: During network optimization, you must manually set the network
to maximum interference mode to obtain the maximum interference of the entire network.
This is achieved by sending the dummy burst on all idle timeslots of a specific area. In the test
start command, set the test time to 1 to 24 hours. The test can be stopped automatically by
software or stopped manually on the LMT.
TCH loopback test: TCH loopback test involves BIU loopback test and TRX RF self-loop
test. In the BIU loopback test, the transmission of the TRX TCH on the BTS DBUS is tested.
The TRX sends the TCH data to the traffic channel of the BTS DBUS. After the loopback
through the TMU, the TRX receives the data sent by the TRX itself. The TRX compares the
data with the original data, and then reports the BER to obtain the link quality of the TCH on
the BTS DBUS. In the TRX RF self-loop test, the quality of the RX channel and TX channel
of the TRX is tested. TRX RF self-test is carried out by the digital signal processing unit in
the TRX. Through the baseband processing unit and the loopback of the RF unit, the data is
transmitted through baseband processing unit again and returned to the digital signal
processing unit. The digital signal processing unit compares the data with the original data
and reports the BER to obtain the quality information regarding the TX and RX channels.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
80
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Transmission performance test: The transmission performance of the E1 port specified by the
BTS. The transmission performance information regarding a specified TMU board can be
learned quickly through the E1 loopback test. Two types of loopback modes are available: E1
loopback and timeslot loopback. When E1 loopback is selected, all the timeslots of a specified
E1 port are tested. When timeslot loopback is selected, the number of the timeslot should be
specified. One timeslot can be tested in one test.
CRC: Operators can decide whether to adopt CRC for the transmission between the BTS and
the BSC.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
BTS antenna system connection detection: This feature is performed for the deployment
and cutover of the BTS and for the troubleshooting of the BTS antenna system. The
feature involves the call test and co-frequency and adjacent frequency check.
Call test: You can enable the call of a specified MS to traverse handovers on the channels
in a cell on the Site Maintenance System and the BSC host. Therefore, the BTS can test
the channels and then report the test result to the Site Maintenance System through the
BSC. The test result is saved as a file for the analysis by tools. The following issues can
be tested: incorrect connection of the antenna system, main and diversity problems,
uplink and downlink balance, one-way audio, and no audio.
Co-frequency and adjacent frequency check under one BTS: This function is performed
during data configuration to provide accurate information to operators. This helps to
avoid the configuration of the same frequency and adjacent frequencies for one BTS
especially for one cell due to improper operation. Such configuration may cause intranetwork interference, but if the configuration is confirmed by the operator, it can be
issued.
GBSS8.1
Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) detection: In the early stage of the network
deployment, VSWR is a key item in the acceptance test. A specialized test tool is
required to measure the VSWR on site and to verify the installation of the antenna
system. The VSWR detection function controls the test of the BTS remotely without
using any specialized tools, and therefore reduces the cost because the maintenance
personnel do not need to conduct the test on site.
Maintenance engineers start the VSWR detection on the U2000 or LMT. The BTS then
configures the test mode, conducts the VSWR test, and restores to the working mode. On
the U2000, you can perform VSWR tests in batches and set the VSWR threshold. The
precision of the reported VSWR is 0.01 with a deviation more than 0.2 in comparison
with the VSWR obtained by using a specialized tool.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3900B does not support VSWR detection.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
81
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.6.11 GBFD-111210 Integrated Network

Management Interface
Availability
Summary
GBSS products access Huawei mobile integrated network management system U2000
through the integrated network management interface.
Benefits
The U2000 is located in the element management-layer (EM-layer) of the telecommunication
management network (TMN) model. It provides a network management interface for the
upper-level network management system (NMS).
The integrated operation and maintenance of the GBSS can be implemented on the
U2000.
The upper-level NMS or the NMS of other vendors can be accessed on the northbound
interface provided by the U2000.
Description
The U2000 is an integrated management system on NE level. It supports the integrated
operation and maintenance of mobile devices. With flexible access modes, the remote
network element devices can access the U2000 through the wide area network (WAN). The
LMT can be placed anywhere on the network. In normal communications, the centralized
maintenance is performed; when the communication with the U2000 is interrupted, the local
maintenance is initiated. In addition, the U2000 provides the northbound interface to access
the upper-level network management system or the network management system of other
vendors.
The GBSS accesses the U2000 on the integrated network management interface of the LMT.
In addition, users can implement functions such as software management, configuration,
maintenance, alarm management, performance statistics, and security management on the
integrated network management interface.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
82
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA

NA
1.6.12 GBFD-116501 Man Machine Language (MML)

Availability
Summary
The BSS supports NE operation and maintenance by using MML commands.
Benefits
MML stands for man machine language. In the daily operation and maintenance, compared
with GUI, MML is more effective and supports the scripts. This feature provides the
following benefits:
Supporting the maintenance of the BSS by using MML commands
Maintaining one or more NEs by using MML scripts
Description
The BSS supports NE operation and maintenance by running MML commands on the U2000
or LMT. Compared with GUI, MML is more effective. You can configure and maintain
multiple NEs by running MML scripts or performing multiple operations on one NE. MML
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
83
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
improves maintenance efficiency, reduces improper manual operations, and greatly reduces
O&M cost of operators.
The MML command supports the following operation modes:
1.
Entering MML commands and parameters directly.
2.
Entering MML commands and parameters on the GUI.
3.
Providing the MML batch processing function. Many MML commands are written in a
file. The LMT reads the MML commands in the file and executes these commands
automatically.
4.
Instant and timed batch processing.
5.
Recording the MML commands and saving the results of the execution of the MML
commands automatically.
6.
Recording operations in the operation logs.
7.
MML pre-activation.
The MML command supports the following operation modes:
1.
Configuring data, including the BTS data using the MML commands.
2.
Performing alarm maintenance functions such as browsing, querying, and manually

recovering alarms, configuring environment alarms, and shielding alarms using MML
commands.
3.
Maintaining BSC devices, transmission devices, signaling links, and interfaces. That is,
using the MML commands, you can maintain the BSC and transmission devices, such as
status query and board switchover.
4.
Maintaining BTS boards and TRXs.
5.
Collecting data files (including logs, performance files, and alarm files) to the LMT.
6.
Performing security management functions such as adding, deleting, and modifying user
information, managing rights of the users, and querying operation logs.
7.
Performing software management functions such as upgrading the BSC software, BTS
software, patches, and maintaining the BIOS and license.
8.
Performing other functions such as setting time and DST.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
CN
Copyright Huawei
84
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.6.13 GBFD-116402 Maintenance Mode Alarm

Availability
Summary
This feature distinguishes the maintenance mode alarms from the common alarms to avoid the
impact of the maintenance mode alarms on the common alarms.
Benefits
This feature prevents sudden increase in the number of alarms during engineering operations
such as network upgrade and maintenance, improving the network maintenance efficiency.
Description
With the network operation and development, the engineering operations such as network
upgrade, capacity expansion, and commissioning of the BSS system are inevitable. Therefore,
a large number of maintenance mode alarms are generated because of the temporary state of
the engineering operations. If these alarms are not separated from the common alarms, the
common alarms generated by the BTS/BSC are masked. This greatly affects the operators'
normal monitoring of the network.
This feature distinguishes the maintenance mode alarms from the common alarms. By setting
the engineering object before engineering operations, the EMS/NMS system can distinguish
the maintenance mode alarms from the common alarms. In addition, the EMS/NMS system
can configure the receiving strategy of the maintenance mode alarms and filter out the
maintenance mode alarms, reducing the impact of the maintenance mode alarms on the
system load.
This feature supports configuration of the BTS or the BSC as the engineering object. When
the BTS is configured as the engineering object, all the related device alarms, service alarms,
and transmission alarms are maintenance mode alarms. When the BSC is configured as the
engineering object, all the BSC alarms and the alarms about the BTSs managed by the BSC
are maintenance mode alarms. The duration of the maintenance mode alarm can be set. The
engineering object is restored to non-engineering object after the set duration. The alarms
generated by the non-engineering object are viewed as common alarms.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
85
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
The following U2000 feature must be activated: WOFD-014300 Maintenance Mode
Management
NA

NA
1.6.14 GBFD-113523 NAT Beside OM

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the network address translation (NAT) firewall is deployed on the LMT side
and the U2000 side to maintain the network security without affecting the normal connections
between devices.
Benefits
Firewall is a basic technology to maintain the network security. The NAT firewall protects the
internal network by hiding the internal network address using the NAT technology. Therefore,
the network security is enhanced. According to the actual requirements, the customer can
deploy the NAT firewall as follows:
Deploy the NAT firewall on the U2000 to prevent the attack from the network.
Deploy the NAT firewall on the LMT so that multiple LMTs on the same network segment are
connected to the GBSC by using the same IP address, saving the public network IP resources.
Description
To ensure the GBSS network security, the NAT firewall needs to be deployed between the
GBSC and the LMT or the U2000. The NAT technology converts the IP address in the IP
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
86
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
header to another IP address. Through the NAT firewall, the IP address and port number in the
IP packet of the network device are changed. The GBSC is interconnected to the LMT and the
U2000. When one side initiates the connection, the other side cannot be properly connected
because the new IP address and port number of the other side are inaccessible.
The NAT beside OM feature supports the deployment of the NAT firewall on the U2000 and
the LMT but not on the GBSC. After starting the NAT firewall, configure the GBSC as the
server and the U2000 and the LMT as the clients. Then, initiate the connections from the
U2000 and the LMT to the GBSC. In this manner, the GBSC can be connected properly
because the IP address of the GBSC is not converted by using the NAT technology.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.7 Software Management

1.7.1 MRFD-210401 BSC/RNC Software Management
Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
87
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
This feature provides functions of software installation, software upgrade, and patch
installation of the MBSC. This facilitates the remote management of the MBSC software.
Benefits
This feature provides functions of software installation, software upgrade, and patch
installation of the MBSC, reducing the O&M cost for operators.
Description
The MBSC supports the software management. This feature facilitates the remote
management of the MBSC software. The operators can run the MML commands to:
Query the information about the software version and other information about the
running system.
Upload, download, and activate the program file, patch file, and license file, and copy
the data files and log files to the FTP server.
Use the BAM server of the MBSC as the FTP server and transmit files such as program
file and patch file by using the wildcard between the FTP server and the FTP client.
Perform the remote patch upgrade of the BAM server of the MBSC.
Use the MBSC as the transmission medium to transmit files between the U2000 and the
MBTS.
In addition, the operators can control the product software at the operation and maintenance
center (OMC), including the program, patch, license, data, and log. The OMC can identify
and match the product software version. In this way, the efficiency of product upgrade and
data downloading is improved.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Supports the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS software.
GBSS13.0
Software digital signature of the controller: The integrity and correctness of the software
are ensured by using the software digital signature solution. The software digital
signature is a solution where digital signature is added to the software and the
information containing the digital signature is compressed into the software package
before the product software is released. When the U2000 delivers the software to NEs or
the software is directly loaded to NEs, it verifies the digital signature. The software
package is considered as integrate, reliable, and usable only after it passes the
verification. Otherwise, the software package is considered as illegal.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
88
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA

NA
1.7.2 MRFD-210402 BTS/NodeB Software

Management
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the operator to remotely manage the software installation and upgrade of
the MBTS. This feature supports enhanced functions such as automatic change of the
signaling bandwidth, software downloading based on the configuration, software
downloading resumption, downloading and activation of software in batches, and hot
patching.
Benefits
This feature provides efficient and accurate software installation, software upgrade, and
software version management.
Description
This feature helps the operator to remotely manage the MBTS software. The operator can
perform the following operations using MML commands:
Efficient and correct installation and upgrade of the software
Check on compatibility of the software and hardware versions to ensure successful

software installation and upgrade
Version management, for example, the hardware and software version query
Automatic data conversion during the software upgrade
The process of upgrading the software of the network element is as follows:
Download the software package from the OMC U2000 to the MBTS using the OMCH.
Run the software activation command on the OMC U2000 client.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
89
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The MBTS automatically loads the software to the corresponding board and switches
over the active and standby directories on the MBTS.
The following are the enhancement features of the MBTS software management:
UBR/UBR+ is supported on the OMCH. When the traffic is heavy, the OMCH rate is
fixed at 64 kbit/s. When the traffic is light, the OMCH bandwidth is automatically
increased to increase the software downloading efficiency.
Software downloading based on the configuration can reduce 30% of the software
package and shorten the downloading time. When a board is added, the system supports
only the software downloading for the corresponding board to improve the downloading
efficiency.
If the network recovers in 24 hours after the network breakdown, the system supports
software downloading resumption to avoid that the software is downloaded repeatedly.
A maximum of 500 MBTSs can be selected to download and activate the software in
batches automatically. The default value is 50 MBTSs in one batch.
Hot patching without resetting the MBTS is supported to minimize the negative impact
on the traffic.
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
The hot patching is introduced that BTS do not need to restart.
GBSS12.0
Remote Loading Speed Improvement of BTS Software: The speed of BTS/NodeB
software remote loading is increased. The time required for software loading is shortened
to 15 to 20 minutes for one BTS.
GBSS13.0
GBSS integrity check: This function ensures the software accuracy and integrity using
the software digital signature scheme. With this function, the MBTS checks and verifies
the digital signature when loading the software. If the verification passes, the MBTS
regards that the software package is complete and reliable. If the verification fails, the
MBTS regards that the software package is invalid.
GBSS14.0
The BTS3900E and BTS3900B support the GBSS integrity check function.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
GBTS(UMPT) does not support the remote loading speed improvement of BTS
software.
MS
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
90
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA

NA
1.7.3 GBFD-111213 Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS

Software
Availability
Summary
Remote upgrade of the BSC&BTS software involves the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS
software.
Benefits
This feature is especially applicable to the system upgrade in the rural area. Multiple
network elements can be upgraded simultaneously without local operation, improving
the working efficiency of the maintenance personnel.
The upgrade of the GBSS can be remotely implemented on the U2000. As this feature
supports batch upgrade of multiple network elements, this can save the time and
workload of the maintenance personnel, and reduce the time of the service disruption
caused by the system upgrade.
The remote software upgrade can be implemented on the GUI of the U2000 for ease of
operation.
Description
Remote upgrade of the BSC&BTS software involves the remote upgrade of the BSC and BTS
software, and the automatic remote upgrade of the LMT.
Remote upgrade of the BSC software

Huawei BSS supports remote upgrade of the host software and OMU software of the
BSC on the integrated network management system (U2000). The remote upgrade of the
BSC software provides downloading, uploading, and activation of the BSC host software
and OMU software. In case the upgrade fails, this function also enables the rollback of
the BSC software version and data configuration. After the software is loaded
successfully, the system automatically loads and activates the license file. The remote
upgrade also supports the upgrade of the cold patches and hot patches.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Remote upgrade of the BTS software

Copyright Huawei
91
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The remote upgrade of the BTS software involves three steps: downloading the BTS
software to the BSC from the U2000, loading the BTS software to the BTS boards
through the BSC, and activating the BTS software of the BTS boards through the BSC.
After the BTS software is downloaded to the BSC on the U2000, both the one-key
upgrade and the automatic upgrade are supported. In the case of one-key upgrade, the
maintenance personnel load and activate the BTS software on the U2000. In the case of
automatic upgrade, the maintenance personnel configure the information about the BTS
software version to be upgraded and then the BSC automatically upgrades the BTS
software without manual intervention.
Automatic LMT remote upgrade

LMT is the GUI-based maintenance terminal of the GBSC. The LMT version must
match the GBSC version. To simplify the maintenance, the GBSC downloads the
corresponding LMT version on the U2000 during the GBSC software upgrade. The LMT
is then installed automatically and restarted. If the LMT automatic installation fails, the
LMT is rolled back to the previous version. To avoid downloading the LMT installation
package for each upgrade, you can download the patch package and install only the
updated part.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA

NA
1.7.4 MRFD-210403 License Management

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
92
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
This feature involves the MBSC license control and MBTS license control.
Benefits
With this feature, the operators can purchase the license based on the network development,
reducing the initial cost of the network deployment.
Description
The license file is used to determine whether the optional features are available and how many
optional features are available.
If a BSC is configured with only GBTS(GTMU), the BSC and all BTSs share one BSC
license file. The BSC uniformly assigns the license to all BTSs under the BSC.
If a BSC is configured with only GBTS(UMPT), all GBTS(UMPT) under the BSC share one
GBTS(UMPT) license file. The BSC assigns itself a BSC license. The U2000 assigns the
GBTS(UMPT) license to all GBTS(UMPT) under the BSC.
If a BSC is configured with both GBTS(GTMU) and GBTS(UMPT), all GBTS(GTMU) and
GBTS(UMPT) under the BSC share one GBTS(UMPT) license file. The U2000 assigns the
license to all GBTS(UMPT) under the BSC and assigns the license residual to the BSC. Then,
the BSC assigns itself the license and assigns the license residual to all GBTS(GTMU) under
the BSC.
The operators can manage and query the contents in the license file using the LMT or the
U2000 client.
The characteristics of the MBSC license management are as follows:
The license file is downloaded from the U2000 and is controlled and activated on the
MBSC side.
The license can be used within one MBSC but not between the MBSCs.
The characteristics of the GBTS(UMPT) license management are as follows:
The U2000 assigns the GBTS(UMPT) license to all GBTS(UMPT) after the
GBTS(UMPT) license file is loaded onto the U2000. When a BSC is configured with
both GBTS(GTMU) and GBTS(UMPT), some license control items need to be allocated
to the BSC for GBTS management.
GBTS(UMPT) license information can be distributed only between GBTS(UMPT) under

one BSC.
The characteristics of the NodeB license management are as follows:
All the NodeBs under one RNC share one license file. That is, one RNS corresponds to
one license file. Each license file records the license information about all NodeBs in the
RNS.
The license is distributed on the U2000 and is controlled by the NodeB. The distribution
results are sent to the NodeB from the U2000.
The license information can be distributed between NodeBs but not between RNCs. The
total number of a control item cannot exceed the number recorded in the license file.
New or upgraded license files can be ordered from Huawei.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
93
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA

NA
1.8 GBSS Network Architecture

1.8.1 GBFD-114601 Multi-Cell Function
Availability
This feature was available from GBSS6.1.
Summary
When this feature is enabled, one BTS can be configured with up to 12 cells.
Benefits
This feature meets the requirement for special networking and saves the investment of
operators.
Description
In some special scenarios, one BTS is required to support more than three cells. In the
GSM900/DCS1800 dual-band networking, the following configurations are required:
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
94
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GSM900 Sx/x/x and DCS1800 Sy/y/y. In this case, one BTS should be configured with six
cells.
In Huawei GBSS, one BTS supports up to 12 cells and meets the requirements of special
networking scenarios, especially the dual-band networking. This saves the investment of
operators.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.8.2 GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet

Availability
Summary
With BTS combined cabinets, the capacity of the BTS site is greatly increased.
Benefits
The high-capacity sites can reduce the construction cost of the equipment rooms for operators.
Therefore, the deployment of large sites in urban areas helps to reduce the number of sites,
increase the network capacity, and save the construction cost.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
95
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
The number of TRXs available in one BTS cabinet is limited; therefore, if the number of
TRXs required by the synchronous cells is greater than one BTS cabinet can handle, then the
combined cabinets should be used. A maximum of two BTS cabinets can be combined into a
cabinet group. With the high-capacity sites, operators can reduce the construction cost of the
equipment rooms. Therefore, the deployment of large sites in urban areas helps to reduce the
number of sites, increase the network capacity, and save the construction cost.
In combined cabinets, the cabinet configured with the main control unit is the basic cabinet
and the cabinet not configured with the main control unit is the extension cabinet. The basic
cabinet and extension cabinet share the common boards. The clock signals, data, O&M
signals are transmitted from the basic cabinet to the extension cabinet through certain cabling.
The capability of combined cabinets supported by the BTS is as follows:
The BTS312 and BTS3012 support the combination of two cabinets while the BTS3006C and
BTS3002E support the combination of three cabinets.
The BTS3002C, BTS3012II, and BTS3012AE do not support the combination of cabinets.
For the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and DBS3900, one BBU supports the maximum cell
configuration of S12/12/12.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The DBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900ALand BTS3900B do not
support this feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
96
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.8.3 GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group

Availability
Summary
With BTS hybrid cabinet group, the capacity of the BTS site is greatly increased.
Benefits
The BTS hybrid cabinet group feature increases the capacity of the current network and
facilitates the smooth network upgrade for improved network performance and increased
functions.
Description
Regardless of the number of cabinets that constitute the cabinet group, one cabinet group
supports a maximum of 24 TRXs. If the number of TRXs in a synchronous cell exceeds 24,
then multiple cabinet groups should be combined. Generally, this is used for capacity
expansion. The cabinets that constitute the cabinet group can be of the same type or of
different types. The total number of TRXs in a cabinet group of a synchronous site cannot
exceed 72.
The cabinet group that provides the clock sources for the cells is called the basic cabinet
group, which is configured with one or two TMU boards; the other cabinet groups are called
extension cabinet groups. The basic cabinet in a cabinet group can be configured with one
TMU board. The E1 cables connect the TMU boards of the basic cabinets. The clock signals
and O&M signaling between the cabinet groups are transmitted over the cabling between the
basic cabinet of the basic cabinet group and the basic cabinet of an extension cabinet, and then
the clock signals and O&M signaling are transmitted from the basic cabinet of a cabinet group
to the extension cabinet of the cabinet group.
The capability of cabinet groups supported by the BTS is as follows:
Cabinet group of the same cabinet type:
The BTS312 and BTS3012 support three cabinet groups, each with two combined cabinets,
enabling an S24/24/24 synchronous site.
The BTS3012II supports the grouping of three cabinets, enabling an S18/18/18 synchronous
site.
The BTS3012AE supports the grouping of three cabinets, enabling an S12/12/12 synchronous
site.
The BTS3006C supports two cabinet groups, each with three combined cabinets, enabling an
S12/12/12 synchronous site.
The BTS3002E supports two cabinet groups, each with three combined cabinets, enabling an
S4/4/4 synchronous site.
The cabinet group is not applicable to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and DBS3900.
Cabinet group of different cabinet types:
The BTS3012 can be grouped with the BTS312 and BTS30.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
97
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The DBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, BTS3900E, and
BTS3900B do not support this feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.8.4 GBFD-118801 BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing

Availability
Summary
Based on the Platform of Advanced Radio Controller (PARC), BSC cabinet/subrack sharing
enables the BSC, TC, PCU, and MGW to share one cabinet.
Benefits
Currently, operators become more and more concerned about the cost, so the reduction of
equipment construction and maintenance costs becomes increasingly important. This feature
enables operators to reduce the cost from the following aspects and to realize smooth
evolution from 2G network to 3G network.
The shared-cabinet technique helps to achieve network integration, save the equipment
floor space, and reduce the O&M cost.
Multiple equipment that share one cabinet can unify the maintenance for 2G and 3G
networks, the access and core networks. Then, the O&M cost is reduced.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
98
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
Cabinet sharing among the BSC, TC, and MGW: Huawei BSC allows the BSC, TC, and
MGW to share one cabinet for reducing space and cost. Huawei softswitch products include
the MSC server (MSS) and MGW. The MSC server is responsible for call control and
signaling, and the MGW is responsible for switching and service bearing.
The equipment can be deployed in a distributed way: The MSC server is deployed in the
center of a big city and the MGW is deployed in a place close to the access network. With this
optimized networking configuration, the calling party and called party are controlled by the
same MGW and the voice data is only switched in the MGW instead of the MSC server,
saving transmission resources.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0
Subrack sharing among the BSC, TC, and PCU: Huawei BSC allows the BSC, TC, and
PCU to share one subrack. One subrack can provide CS services and PS services. Then,
one cabinet can provide CS services and PS services for 2,048 TRXs. Therefore, the
system integration is greatly improved and the space and O&M cost are reduced.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.8.5 MRFD-210204 Star Topology

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
99
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
With this feature, each MBTS is directly connected to the MBSC through the transmission
link.
Benefits
Star topology is a traditional networking scheme. The network architecture is simple and the
link reliability is high. Therefore, the maintenance cost is reduced.
Description
The star topology applies to urban areas, especially densely populated areas. In star topology,
each MBTS is directly connected to the MBSC through the transmission link. The MBTSs are
mutually independent. Therefore, the network architecture is simple. This topology usually
applies to sites in large configuration.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.8.6 MRFD-210205 Chain Topology

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
100
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
With this feature, the MBTSs can be connected in chain topology.
Benefits
Chain topology is a traditional networking scheme. With this feature, the timeslot switching
function of the MBTS enables the timeslots of an MBTS to be shared with the lower-level
MBTSs for transmission. Therefore, the transmission cost and investment on the timeslot
switching device are saved.
Description
The chain topology is used along the highways or railway tracks and in sparsely populated
areas. It can greatly save the transmission resources. In some cases, multiple E1 links can be
used for transmission in chain topology. The levels of MBTSs in chain topology should not
exceed five.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3900B does not support this feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP
1.8.7 MRFD-210206 Tree Topology

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
101
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
With this feature, the MBTSs can be connected in tree topology.
Benefits
Tree topology is a traditional networking scheme and applies to the microwave transmission
network. With this feature, the timeslot switching function of the MBTS enables the timeslots
of an MBTS to be shared with the lower-level MBTSs for transmission. Therefore, the
transmission cost and investment on the timeslot switching device are saved.
Description
The tree topology is used in the large and sparsely populated areas. The tree topology has a
lower demand for the transmission cables than the star topology. The transmission reliability,
however, is reduced and the construction and maintenance are complicated because signals
pass through many nodes. In addition, the fault in one MBTS may affect the normal operation
of its lower-level MBTSs. The tree topology applies to areas in which the subscriber
distribution is complicated. In addition, capacity expansion is difficult because it may involve
big modification of the network architecture.
In tree topology, the MBTS obtains the clock signals by locking to the upper-level network.
Each phase-lock can decrease the quality of the clock signals. Therefore, the levels of MBTSs
must not exceed five.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
102
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.8.8 GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP

Availability
Summary
This feature provides an IP-based connection between BSCs for information exchange.
Benefits
Provides a direct transmission path between BSCs.
Provides a direct channel to exchange information between BSCs and enables the interBSC soft-synchronized network and IBCA functions.
Description
The IP-based inter-BSC connection enables operators to use the IP network to connect the
BSCs so that the BSCs can communicate with each other directly. This feature is applicable to
the scenarios of inter-BSC information exchange. For example, when the inter-BSC softsynchronized network or the IBCA is enabled, this feature is required. The inter-BSC
connection supports only the inter-BSC signaling switching. The CS or PS is not supported.
The BSC must be configured with the IP interface board. Huawei IP interface boards support
FE and GE interfaces, which support the IPv4 protocol. The BSCs in the same equipment
room may be connected through layer 2 switches. The BSCs in different equipment rooms
may be connected through layer 3 switches. The interconnection method depends on the local
network planning of the BSC.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
An IP interface board is required.
BSC6910 Hardware
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
103
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.9 System Reliability

1.9.1 GBFD-111701 Board Switchover
Availability
Summary
In daily operations, the active board takes charge of the normal operation of the services and
the standby one performs real-time backup for the active board. When the active board is
faulty, the services are switched to the standby board for continuous operation of the system.
Benefits
The reliability of the BSS and the MTBF of the system is greatly improved, and the service
disruptions caused by the faults of a board are reduced.
Description
To ensure the reliable operation for the system, Huawei GBSS provides redundancy solutions
for all the boards (except for the boards designed for the resource pool), that is, the boards are
classified into the active board and the standby board. The active board processes services
while the standby board performs real-time backup for the active one. If the active board is
faulty or needs to be replaced, the services can be switched over to the standby board. In this
way, the system can work continuously.
There are two kinds of switchovers. One is automatic switchover. That is, the services are
automatically switched over from the active board to the standby board. Another one is
manual switchover. That is, the maintenance personnel perform the board switchover on the
LMT. The maintenance personnel send an immediate switchover command to the system, and
a specially designed maintenance module instructs relevant boards to perform switchover.
To perform the active/standby switchover successfully, the following conditions must be met:
The standby board must be in position and work properly. No major or critical alarm is
reported. When the standby board is switched over to the active one, the original active board
will reset automatically. If this board starts properly, it will be the standby one. In this way,
the boards are kept in backup status.
Boards that work in active/standby mode can be switched over. Boards that work in a nonactive/standby mode, such as in independent or resource pool mode, cannot be switched over.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
104
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.9.2 GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control

Availability
Summary
When the system is overloaded, the system reduces the traffic of the access system or disables
some maintenance functions according to the priorities. In this way, the normal operation of
the main services in the system is ensured, and the normal traffic and load can be restored in a
relatively short time.
Benefits
This feature ensures the stable and reliable operation of the system.
Description
When the system load exceeds the processing capability due to excessive traffic volume or
other causes, the BSC initiates the flow control and takes measures for the normal provision
of important services. In this way, the system robustness is improved.
GBSS flow control involves the internal flow control and traffic flow control.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
105
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The internal flow control prevents load increase caused by O&M or restricts some supporting
functions when the traffic is relatively high. This protects the system against breakdown and
ensures the successful access of user services.
Service flow control restricts some common services to ensure the provision of key services
when the traffic exceeds certain level. In this way, the system load can be restored to normal
quickly. When the network sends many paging messages or many MSs access the network at
the same time, the services may not be processed in time. In this case, the system may discard
some paging messages or reject some access requests, so that the traffic can be controlled
within a defined range.
In terms of the service design, the system performs different protections on different levels to
maintain the KPIs in the normal state when the traffic is overloaded in some areas caused by
the imbalance of the service distribution. In this case, the flow control involves the RSL flow
control, flow control of the single BTS, and overload protection of the TRX.
By using flow control algorithms of different levels, the system automatically provides the
flow control protection after the services exceed the system specifications, and takes measures
to stabilize the system load, maintaining the user service within the range allowed by the
system and ensuring the robustness of the system to prevent the breakdown caused by the
overload. In addition, the system can automatically change the restriction measures according
to the decrease in the load. In this way, the system load can be restored to normal quickly.
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
Flow control for A interface boards is added to prevent board resets. Main processing
unit (MPU) flow control and backpressure are also added. If signaling is configured for
one A interface board, the processing capability of the CPU on that board becomes
insufficient and therefore the system capacity is limited.
PS paging flow control is added and the PS paging priority is decreased.
Flow control for PIU interface boards is added.
GBSS14.0
Flow control for signaling over the A interface is added. If the signaling links over the A
interface are congested or the processing capability of the CN is insufficient, the BSC
restricts the traffic access volume to meet the signaling processing capability of the A
interface. This prevents severe signaling congestion over the A interface and therefore
increases the valid traffic volume.
The emergency call preemption function is added. When transmission resources are
insufficient, emergency calls are allowed to preempt transmission resources occupied by
common calls. This ensures that emergency calls can be successfully set up.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
106
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.9.3 GBFD-112301 Remote EAC Maintenance

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the remote EAC maintenance.
Benefits
Improves the maintenance efficiency
Reduces the O&M cost for the operators
Description
The remote EAC maintenance feature allows the users to query data, set parameters, and run
commands on the BTS environment monitor device on the LMT.
After the EAC is configured, 32-channel Boolean value input/digital value input, 8-channel
digital value output, and 8-channel analog input are supported. The burglar alarm, temperature
alarm, humidity alarm, fire alarm, and other alarms are also supported. This feature allows the
users to query data, set parameters and execute commands on the BTS environment monitor
device on the LMT, including reset and clear the burglar alarm, set the thresholds of the
temperature and humidity, set the alarm, and query the temperature or humidity. Once
generated, the environment alarm should be reported to the central equipment room, and then
the maintenance personnel should be notified for further processing.
The EAC can be maintained remotely, improving the maintenance efficiency.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
107
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.9.4 GBFD-111214 Operation & Maintenance

System One-Key Recovery
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the quick recovery of the operating system or the configuration data.
Benefits
Reduces the complexity of the backup and recovery of the operating system or the
configuration data of the GOMU or the BAM server.
Reduces the time of the service disruption caused by the operation and maintenance.
Description
The O&M system of Huawei BSS includes the GBAM and GOMU. Both adopt the Linux
operating system. If the operating system is corrupted, you can run commands to recover the
operating system by connecting a PC that supports the boot from CD-ROM to the GOMU or
BAM server.
The CD-ROM delivered with Huawei equipment contains the initial backup of the system,
and operators can restore the BSC to the default state. In addition, operators can back up the
BSC operating system or configuration data at any time, and restore the system to the status of
the backup time.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
108
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.9.5 GBFD-111211 Reporting the Temperature List

of the BTS Equipment Room
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the temperature monitoring switch of the BTS equipment room, realtime query, and downloading of the temperature information log of the BTS equipment room.
Benefits
The temperature of the BTS equipment room affects the ventilation of the BTS equipment
room and the power consumption of the air conditioner. In addition, it may cause a fire
warning.
As the operational expenditure of mobile operators increases, maintaining the functionality
and reducing the manpower of the operation and maintenance have become an effective
method of reducing the cost. This feature provides the following benefits:
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
This feature not only reduces the manpower of the O&M and check, but also helps
operators monitor the temperature of the BTS equipment room. In addition, the air
Copyright Huawei
109
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
conditioner can be remotely adjusted by other ways according to the actual situation. In
this way, the energy consumption can be reduced and operators achieve the aim of
becoming green operators.
This feature not only reduces the manpower, but also finds the safety problems in
advance such as the abnormal temperature change, fire, and outside damage.
Description
This feature can start and stop the detection of the temperature information of the BTS
equipment room.
The detection of the temperature information of the BTS equipment room is started or stopped
on the site maintenance terminal or LMT. Users can set the period of reporting the
temperature of the BTS equipment room. A message is displayed on the site maintenance
terminal or LMT, indicating whether the reporting of the temperature information of the BTS
equipment room is started or stopped successfully.
On the U2000 client, you can download the files of the temperature of the equipment room
from the OMU in FTP mode. In addition, you can also query the files of the temperature
information of the equipment room and save the query results on the client.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
The temperature sensor and EMUA/EMU are required.
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
110
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.9.6 MRFD-210101 System Redundancy

Availability
Summary
This feature provides the reliability designs such as the active/standby mode, load sharing,
and redundancy configuration, improving the system reliability.
Benefits
This feature improves the system stability and therefore ensures the network performance.
Description
To ensure the reliable operation of the system, reliability designs such as the active/standby
mode, load sharing, and redundancy configuration are widely used in Huawei GBSS/RAN.
In resource pool mode, the load sharing is performed among processing units in the pool. The
processing unit is not backed up. When one or multiple processing units are faulty, the
ongoing services are interrupted, and the new services requests are allocated to other normal
processing units in the resource pool.
In active/standby mode, the active board processes services while the standby board acts as a
backup of the active one. If the active board is faulty or needs to be replaced, the services can
be switched over to the standby board. In this way, the system can work continuously.
There are two types of switchover. One is automatic switchover. That is, the services are
automatically switched over from the active board to the standby board when the active board
is faulty. The other one is manual switchover. That is, the maintenance personnel perform the
board switchover on the LMT. If the active/standby switchover is allowed, a dedicated
maintenance module instructs the relevant boards to perform the switchover after the
maintenance engineer sends an immediate switchover command to the system.
To perform the active/standby switchover successfully, the following conditions must be met:
The standby board must be in position and work properly.
No major or critical alarm is reported.
When the standby board is switched over to the active one, the original active board will reset
automatically. If this board restarts properly, it becomes the standby one. In this way, the
boards still work in active/standby mode.
Redundancy configuration consists of the following units: boards, transmission interfaces,
power, and fans. The software version and important data configuration file are backed up to
ensure that the system works properly even if exception occurs in the file or data.
For the BSC6900, the dual-switching system of the control plane and user plane is applied. In
addition, the resource pool of control plane and user plane is designed. For the service
processing boards, the resource pool is adopted. That is, load-sharing is performed in the
resource pool. For other boards, the backup mode is adopted. That is, the boards of the same
type in two neighboring slots work in active/standby mode. The resource pool is
independently established within the GSM or UMTS.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
111
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Huawei BTS/NodeB supports the board-level backup. Two boards of the same type work in
active/standby mode. When the active board is faulty, an active/standby switchover is
performed and the previously standby board works in active mode.
For the interface board, the board backup mode is adopted. Some interface boards support the
standard backup modes specified in protocols, such as MSP 1+1 or MSP 1:1. When detecting
that the board is faulty, the system re-establishes the transmission of the ongoing services on
the standby board by adopting an active/standby switchover. When detecting that the active
channel is damaged, the system enables the transmission of the ongoing services to recover on
the standby channel by adopting an active/standby switchover.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Only the BTS3012 and BTS3012AE support DTMU redundancy for the BTS system
redundancy.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.9.7 MRFD-210102 Operate System Security

Management
Availability
Summary
This feature provides the customized security policy and patch management for the operating
system on the OMU.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
112
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Benefits
This feature ensures system reliability and prevents the security threats and attacks on the
operating system.
Description
This feature provides the customized security policy and patch management for the operating
system on the OMU.
Customized security management of the operating system:
The customized security policy protects the operating system from being attacked and
therefore enhances the security of the operating system. This feature can be applied to the
Windows 2003 Server and the Linux operating system. The customize security policies are as
follows:
Execution policy
You can execute one or more policies and record the execution results in log files.
Rollback policy
After executing a security policy, if you want to restore the system to the previous state or
customize the policy again, then you can restore the executed policy.
Generating backup files
You can save the status of a policy into a file. This file can be used as a backup for rollback.
Saving settings
You can save the current policy settings.
Exporting settings
You can export the current policy settings to another file.
Importing settings
You can import the file containing the policy settings into the system. In this way, the system
has the same settings.
Importing the configuration file of the earlier version
You can import the configuration file of the earlier version to the SetWin.
Reloading the configuration file
The SetWin/SetSuse has an inherent configuration file. You can reload this configuration file
to the SetWin/SetSuse.
Patch management of the operating system:
Based on the type of the operating system, you can timely perform the patch compatibility test
to ensure that the patch is valid. The patch list corresponding to the operating system is
provided at least twice a year.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
113
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.9.8 MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the transmission of two combined FEs, improving the reliability of FE
transmission and meeting the requirements of higher data flow.
Benefits
This feature provides the method for improving the transmission reliability.
Description
Huawei GBSS/RAN implements the link aggregation based on IEEE802.3ad, improving the
system reliability and providing higher bandwidth.
This feature applies to the scenario where high reliability is required, for example, on the
ports of the MBSC and the hub NodeB where links are bundled together.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
114
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Figure 1.1 Networking for Link Aggregation
Enhancement
GBSS15.0
GBTS(UMPT) can support this feature.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BSC supports this feature, The BTS does not support this feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
Transmission equipment that connected to the BSC/RNC must support this feature.
NA

NA
1.9.9 MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing

Availability
Summary
This feature provides the resource sharing of the user plane and control plane in the MBSC by
adopting the intra-subrack/inter-subrack load sharing mechanism of boards.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
115
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Benefits
This feature improves the resource utilization and increases the call success rate. It also
maximizes the capacity usage in different traffic modes.
Description
The BSC/RNC Resource Sharing feature is classified into user plane resource sharing and
control plane resource sharing.
Control plane resource sharing applies to CPU usage and memory. When the CPU usage of a
certain signaling processing unit is too high or when the memory of a certain signaling
process unit is insufficient, the new call is transferred to other signaling processing unit with a
low load.
User plane resources are shared dynamically within the system based on resource pool and
load sharing. If a certain user plane processing unit is overloaded, the new traffic can be
allocated to other user plane processing unit with lower load.
For the MBSC, the service type-based resource pools are as follows: GSM control plane
resource, GSM user plane resource, UMTS control plane resource, and UMTS user plane
resource. The resource sharing within the pool is supported, but the resource sharing between
pools is not supported.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
116
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.9.10 GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX

Due to PSU Failure
Availability
Summary
If a BTS uses an AC power input and the power switch unit (PSU) is faulty, the power
amplifiers of some TRXs are shut down to reduce the power demand of the BTS to ensure the
normal operation of the BTS.
Benefits
This feature ensures that the remaining PSUs are not overloaded and prevents the BTSs being
powered off when some PSUs are faulty. Therefore, the BTS can continue to work
uninterrupted.
This feature can reduce the battery consumption.
This feature can avoid the deterioration of the KPIs due to the sudden BTS power failure.
Description
When a BTS uses an AC power input, the PSU is needed for the AC/DC conversion. When
some PSUs are faulty, the output of the remaining PSUs cannot satisfy the power demand of
the BTS. In this case, the overcurrent protection mechanism of the PSU takes effect, which
leads to the BTS power failure.
In such a case, the BTS shuts down parts of the TRXs to reduce the power demand. To ensure
that the normal services are not affected, the BTS calculates the number of TRXs that need to
be shut down and then reports the number to the BSC. When the BSC receives the message
from the BTS, it stops allocating new calls to the TRXs to be shut down. When no service is
carried on the TRX to be shut down, the BTS shuts down the power amplifier of the TRX.
After the fault on the PSU is rectified, the BTS restarts the TRXs that are shut down.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The DBS3900 and BTS3900 support this feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
The DBS3900 and BTS3900 support this feature.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
MS
Copyright Huawei
117
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
The Huawei equipment, such as APM30, is required.
NA

NA
1.9.11 GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control

Availability
Summary
In case of emergencies or disasters, congestion occurs. When the traffic load is high, flow
control measures will be taken. This feature allows mobile originated calls (MOCs) and
mobile terminated calls (MTCs) to be subjected to different flow control policies.
Benefits
With this feature, telecom operators can ensure the success rate of MOCs or MTCs by using
different flow control policies in the case of emergencies or disasters.
Description
In case of emergencies or disasters, the traffic load may become very high as there will
usually be a large number of MOCs and MTCs. In such a case, flow control needs to be
performed to hold the system load to a proper level.
This feature identifies MOCs and MTCs by different flags and protects either MOCs or MTCs
from the effects of flow control. It also allows telecom operators to decide whether to discard
signaling of MOCs or MTCs using flow control.
The precedence of MOCs and MTCs in flow control is customer-definable.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
118
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control

NA
1.9.12 GBFD-113801 TRX Cooperation

Availability
Summary
With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the
cell automatically rectifies the faults. Therefore, the services in the cell are not affected before
the faulty TRX is replaced.
Benefits
The TRX Cooperation feature ensures that the cell provides services continuously. This
feature reduces the probability that the cell is out of service because of the faulty BCCH TRX.
It also reduces the probability that the call quality in the cell is degraded because of the faulty
TRX involved in the baseband FH. Therefore, the reliability of the network is greatly
improved.
Description
With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the
cell automatically rectifies the faults. Therefore, the services in the cell are not affected before
the faulty TRX is replaced.
Based on the type of faulty TRXs and the handling method, the TRX cooperation is classified
into BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation. For the non-baseband FH
cell, only the BCCH TRX cooperation occurs. For the baseband FH cell, both BCCH TRX
cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation are likely to occur.
BCCH TRX cooperation

In the idle state, the MS needs to obtain information through the broadcast messages sent
on the BCCH. The messages carry information about cell selection, adjacent cell, access
control, dedicated channel control, cell identification code, location, and system
parameters related to the PS services. When a BCCH TRX of a cell is faulty, all the
services in this cell are interrupted. Therefore, when the BCCH TRX is faulty, another
available TRX of the cell is used to substitute the faulty BCCH TRX to ensure that the
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
119
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
cell can continue to provide services. After the fault in the original BCCH TRX is
rectified, the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX. This process is called
BCCH TRX cooperation (including the BSC-controlled BCCH TRX cooperation, BSCcollaborated BCCH TRX cooperation, and BTS-controlled BCCH TRX cooperation).
Baseband FH TRX cooperation

In the baseband FH cell, if the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, some speech
frames in the call using the FH channel are lost. Therefore, the speech quality is
degraded. To ensure the speech quality in the cell, the BSC enables the baseband FH
TRX cooperation and remove the faulty TRX from the FH and continue the FH mode
with the fine running TRX. In this way, the speech quality of the cell is not affected by
the faulty TRX. This process is called baseband FH TRX cooperation.
When the BCCH TRX in a baseband FH cell is faulty, baseband FH TRX cooperation
can also be performed. That is, the cell is changed to the non-FH mode. After all the
faults in the original BCCH TRX and in the TRX involved in FH are rectified, the
baseband FH TRX cooperation can be performed. That is, the BSC changes the non-FH
mode to the FH mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) and GBFD113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping
The baseband FH TRX cooperation function depends on the preceding features.
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell

BTS-controlled BCCH TRX channel cooperation is mutually exclusive with GBFD510104 Multi-site Cell.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing

Copyright Huawei
120
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBTS-controlled BCCH TRX channel cooperation is mutually exclusive with

GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing.
After GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell or GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing is enabled, if a channel on the
BCCH TRX becomes faulty, this feature becomes ineffective automatically.
1.10 Basic features

1.10.1 GBFD-110901 Adjustment of Adaptive Timing
Advance
Availability
Summary
The BTS informs the MS of the timing advance (TA) value by adopting adaptive rules so that
the communication between the BTS and the MS is synchronized.
Benefits
This feature is the basis for services between the MS and the BTS such as synchronization
and calls. The synchronization of the network can be achieved only after this feature is
enabled. Without this feature, all services cannot be properly processed.
Description
An interval of three timeslots exists between the TX signals and RX signals of the MS,
because the MS sends and receives signals with one frequency synthesizer.
After receiving the incoming signals, the MS transmits the outgoing signals at the time delay
of three timeslot plus TA value. Therefore, the TA value sent from the BTS to the MS is
essential. This ensures that the data from MSs at different distances from the BTS arrives at
the BTS in sequence, reducing the interference between signals. This in turn reduces the
interference in the entire network.
When the MS engaged in a call approaches the BTS or moves away from the BTS, the
information that is sent on a timeslot by the MS to the BTS overlaps with the information of
another call received on the next timeslot. In this case, interference is generated.
Therefore, when a call is ongoing, the BTS monitors the arrival of calls and sends commands
to the MS in the system information on the downlink SACCH. In the commands, the BTS
informs the MS of the time to be advanced so that the data sent by the MS can arrive at the
BTS timely. The time is referred to as TA. The TA value ranges from 0 s to 233 s (including
0 s and 233 s). The value affects the coverage range of the cell.
With this feature, the MS TA offset maintains an accuracy of +1/-1 symbol periods.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
121
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.2 GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement

Report
Availability
Summary
The measurement result in the MR is an important reference for power control and handover
decision. The MR processing mainly involves decoding the MR to obtain the measurement
result.
Benefits
The MR includes information required by various BSS algorithms, such as the frequencies,
signal strength, and TA value. The MR is the precondition of power control and handover.
The network can provide high performance only when the MR is supported.
Description
The MR processing is used to report the measurement results and parameters to the BSC for
handover decision and power control. The MR is classified into uplink MR and downlink
MR.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Uplink MR

Copyright Huawei
122
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The uplink MR includes the measurement information on the uplink receive level and
receive quality measured on the TRX.
Downlink MR
The downlink MR includes mainly the measurement information on downlink receive
level and downlink receive quality of the serving cell, and downlink receive level of the
neighboring cell measured by the MS. The downlink measurement result is reported to
the BTS by the MS through the Measurement Report message.
The BTS periodically reports the measurement results of the uplink and downlink to the
BSC through the Measurement Report message. The interval of MR reporting is
consistent with the SACCH multi-frame cycle.
In certain situations, the BTS cannot receive the downlink measurement result from the
MS. In such cases, the Measurement Report message includes only the uplink
measurement result.
After receiving the MR, the BSC performs interpolation and filtering on the
measurement result in the uplink and downlink. Then, the BSC saves the results for
power control and handover decision.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report
Impacted Features
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
123
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.10.3 GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement

Report
Availability
Summary
Pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to perform part of the MR processing
work that the BSC is responsible for, such as interpolation and filtering performed for the
measurement result in the uplink and downlink. After processing, the BTS sends the
processed measurement result to the BSC. This reduces the processing load of the BSC.
Benefits
This feature reduces the signaling flow on the Abis interface and the possibility of
transmission congestion on the Abis interface.
This feature helps reduce the CPU load of the board for signaling processing of the speech
services.
Description
This feature enables the BTS to perform part of the MR pre-processing work that BSC is
responsible for, such as interpolation and filtering. After being processed by the BTS, the
measurement result is reported to the BSC through the Pre-Processed Measurement Report
message.
This feature can be enabled or disabled through the configuration of related parameters. In
addition, the period to report the preprocessed MR is also configurable.
BTS preprocessing of the MR can reduce the signaling flow on the Abis interface and
improve the multiplexing efficiency of the signaling channel.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
124
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report
1.10.4 GBFD-111101 System Information Sending

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS is capable of setting cell system information through the BSC and of
periodically sending the system information by the BTS. On receiving the system
information, the MS adjusts its settings based on the content in the system information.
Benefits
The system information is a key index used by operators to adjust the network and control the
behavior of the MS. The system information also plays an important role in network
optimization.
Proper system information mechanism is essential to a network of high quality.
Better understanding of the system information helps improve the network structure and
build high quality network.
Description
System information contains the primary radio network parameters on the Um interface. The
parameters are as follows: network identification parameters, cell selection parameters,
system control parameters, and network function parameters. By receiving system
information, the MS can access the network and use various services provided by the
network.
Huawei BSS supports 13 system information types: 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 2quater, 3, 4, 5, 5bis, 5ter,
6, 7, and 13. Among them, types 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 2quater, 3, 4, 7, and 13 are broadcast
messages transmitted on the BCCH in idle mode. Types 5, 5bis, 5ter, and 6 are associated
messages transmitted on the SACCH in connected mode.
Among the 13 system information types, 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 3, 4, 5, 5bis, 5ter, and 6 are basic
system information messages. Types 7 and 13 are system information transmitted to support
the GPRS. Type 2quater is the system information transmitted to support the inter-RAT
handover and inter-RAT reselection.
System information messages are sent in two different ways: broadcast message and
associated message.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
125
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
When the MS is in idle mode, it communicates with the network through the broadcast system
information. From the broadcast system information received from the network, the MS
learns its current location and the available service types. Some parameters in the system
information can also help control the cell reselection of the MS.
When the MS is engaged in a call, it communicates with the network through the associated
system information. The network uses certain content in the associated system information to
control the transmission, power, and handover of the MS.
The broadcast system information is closely related to the channel-associated message. The
content in the broadcast system information can overlap with that in the associated message.
The content in the associated message might be inconsistent with that in the broadcast system
information, because the associated message affects only one MS, while the broadcast system
information affects all MSs in idle mode.
System information contains the following key parameters of the network:
Network identity parameter
ATT (IMSI attach-detach allowed)
CCCH CONF (common control channel configuration)
BS AG BLKS RES (number of blocks reserved for access granted)
BS PA MFRMS (paging channel multi-frames)
T3212 (Periodical location update timer)
Cell Channel Description
Neighbor Cells Description
MBR (Multiband Report)
CELL_BAR_ACCESS
This parameter indicates whether a cell allows the access of an MS. It is a one-bit code:
Value 0 indicates that the access is allowed, and value 1 indicates that the access is not
allowed. This parameter does not influence the access of MSs that are handed over to the
cell.
PI (cell re-selection parameter indicator)
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
CN
Copyright Huawei
126
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.5 GBFD-111102 Forced System Information

Sending by OMC
Availability
Summary
Huawei BSS supports the function that the system information can be sent forcibly to a
certain cell through the BSC and the system information of certain cells is updated forcibly.
Benefits
The system information is a key index used by operators to adjust the network and control the
behavior of the MS. The system information also plays an important role in network
optimization. With this feature, the network quality can be further improved as follows:
Proper system information mechanism is essential to a quality network. This feature

enables the network optimization personnel to adjust the parameters and verify the
adjustment for specific cells in real time, facilitating the network optimization.
When problems occur in the network, this feature helps assist the maintenance personnel
in troubleshooting.
This feature enables the operators to improve the network quality, provide better services to
MSs, and improve the user satisfaction.
Description
On the LMT, the system information of a cell can be forcibly updated and sent. During the
network optimization, the system information on the Abis interface can be traced for checking
certain system information configuration. The parameter configuration of system information
can be obtained immediately by using the function of sending system information forcibly.
This feature helps network optimization personnel and maintenance personnel to verify
network parameters after parameter adjustment.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
BSC6900 Hardware
Copyright Huawei
127
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.6 GBFD-111901 Supporting Three-Digit MNC

Availability
Summary
This feature supports both 3-digit and 2-digit MNCs.
Benefits
This feature meets the networking requirements of operators whose MNC is 3 digits.
Description
MNC can be configured as 3 digits or 2 digits according to the network planning.
For the countries and areas with multiple mobile networks, 2-digit MNC cannot specify all the
networks. In this case, 3-digit MNC can be adopted. The number of networks specified by the
MNC is increased from 100 to 1000.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
BSC6910 Hardware
Copyright Huawei
128
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.7 GBFD-116101 Support of Daylight Saving

Time
Availability
Summary
The BSS supports the daylight saving time (DST), which can be configured and queried to
meet the requirements of the countries where the daylight saving time is applied.
Benefits
In normal cases, the DST is one hour earlier than the standard time. With this feature, the
system time can be automatically changed without manual intervention according to the
specified rules.
Description
Huawei BSS can set and query the time zone and DST change rules on the U2000 or LMT.
With the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or
hybrid configuration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain
date in a certain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a
certain day of a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST
starts from or ends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
129
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.8 GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment

Availability
Summary
This feature can dynamically adjust the number of SDCCHs according to the load of the
TCHs and SDCCHs. In this way, the effect of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the
system is minimized and radio resources are fully utilized.
Benefits
Optimizes the usage of the TCHs and SDCCHs, and reduces the occurrence of SDCCH
congestion.
Minimizes the impact of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system, reduces
the requirements on the accuracy of the estimation of the SDCCH, and reduces the
workload for changing the configuration.
Reduces the call access failure caused by the congestion of the SDCCH, improves the
call access rate, and increases the operator revenue.
Description
In normal cases, the demands on the SDCCH are calculated on the basis of the traffic model.
That is, current traffic distribution and related statistics. The increase of the SMS service,
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
130
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
however, leads to the more demands on the SDCCH. Therefore, the prediction on the
demanded SDCCHs becomes very complex.
If the number of MSs in a cell increases sharply in a short time, many MSs fail to access the
network due to no available SDCCH. In this case, the SDCCH dynamic adjustment feature
can convert the TCH into the SDCCH dynamically to enable more MSs to access the network.
The dynamic adjustment of SDCCH takes cell as unit. If the SDCCH dynamic adjustment is
allowed, the system automatically converts the TCH into the SDCCH, provided that the
following conditions are met:
The number of idle SDCCHs is lower than or equal to the threshold of the idle SDCCH.
The number of SDCCHs in a cell is lower than or equal to the maximum number of
SDCCHs in a cell.
The number of idle TCHs in a cell is higher than 4 or higher than the number of TRXs
configured in a cell. At the same time, the BSC sends the configuration command to the
BTS to convert the TCH into the SDCCH, and updates the channel table of the BSC.
When the number of SDCCHs is higher than the defined threshold after the TCH Minimum
Recovery Time, the SDCCHs are converted into the TCHs.
Forced restoration of SDCCH: If you disable the SDCCH/TCH dynamical adjustment feature,
all the SDCCHs converted from TCH are restored to their original form (TCH).
This feature can reduce the requirement on the accuracy of the estimation of the demand on
SDCCH, and reduce the workload for changing the configuration. In addition, it can increase
the system capacity and the call access rate.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
131
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
1.10.9 GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan

Availability
Summary
With this feature, you can test the uplink interference on the basis of the traffic measurement
without the test device.
Benefits
The maintenance personnel can test the uplink interference without the test device. In
this way, the accuracy of the frequency configuration is improved and an overview of the
uplink interference is provided.
Operators can evaluate the electromagnetic environment without the addition of new
devices, which is an observation method of network planning and optimization.
This feature improves the maintenance efficiency and reduces the O&M cost for
operators.
Description
This feature uses the idle TCH to test uplink receive level of all the frequencies of the
specified frequency band. Engineers can use the result to select a proper operating frequency.
This feature is introduced to Huawei products for testing the interference. Because this feature
scans the uplink level, the result indicates the signal strength of the frequency in the cell.
Engineers can use the result to select a proper operating frequency.
The GBSS implements the cell frequency scanning on the basis of the traffic measurement
result. Under the condition that the call is not affected, the feature uses an idle frame in a TCH
in the cell (the TCH in the BCCH TRX is assigned preferably) to periodically scan the uplink
receive level of specified frequencies. It takes about one minute to scan 50 frequencies. A
frequency scan task can register up to 124 frequencies. It takes about three minutes to traverse
all the frequencies.
The result of the frequency scanning is the average value of the uplink receive levels scanned
from the beginning of the scan task to the end of the scan task. The uplink frequency scan
feature is to test the interference level that affects the uplink receive quality in the radio
environment. It can measure the uplink interference of a specific frequency.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
132
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
BTS3900B does not support this feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.10 GBFD-111806 STP (Signaling Transport

Point)
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the signaling transfer function based on the SCCP/M3UA, which
supports a maximum of 32 signaling transfer points (STP).
Benefits
With the development of mobile communications, the networking modes of the core network,
transport network, and access network are more flexible. Huawei GBSS supports this feature
to meet the requirements of the operators in terms of the networking mode. With this feature,
more flexible networking mode can be supported. This feature provides the following
benefits:
Implements the transfer between the CN and the BSC signaling through the MGW,
separating the signaling plane from the user plane.
Implements different levels of the transmission security, ensuring the security of the core
service in an efficient way and reducing the transmission cost.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports the signaling transfer function on the A interface based on the
SCCP/M3UA. With this feature, the BSC can be connected to the MGW through the signaling
transfer mode, providing more transmission networking modes.
Currently, the GBSS supports a maximum of 32 STPs.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
133
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
In the case of 24-digit signaling point, the value of STP code ranges from 0x1 to 0xFFFFFF.
In the case of 14-digit signaling point, the value of STP code ranges from 0x1 to 0x03FFF.
The STP codes should be different from the codes of the existing OSP, STP, or DSP.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.11 GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS supports the connection of the SS7 signaling system and the MSC. The SS7
signaling system adopts 14-digit signaling point code. The signaling point code includes three
parts: macro cell code, zone code, and signaling point code.
Benefits
The signaling point code has different code modes based on different countries and areas.
Generally, it is classified into two types: 14-digit (international) and 24-digit (national)
signaling code modes. Huawei GBSS supports both code modes. This feature provides the
following benefits:
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
134
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
This feature conforms to the requirements of different signaling systems, facilitating the
use of networking in different countries and areas.
The equipment transferred to the area using different code modes can still be used.
Description
This feature supports 14-digit international signaling point.
The code capacity of 14-digit signaling point code is 16,384 codes. 14-digit signaling point
code is classified into three parts: macro cell code, zone code, and signaling point code.
24-digit signaling point code is applied in China since 1990. It is also called uniform code or
one-layer code. This code specifies that all the signaling points of the SS7 signaling network
in China must use 24-digit signaling point code. According to the actual situation, 24-digit
signaling point code is classified into three signaling zones in terms of the structure. That is,
eight digits for codes of main signaling zone, eight digits for codes of sub-signaling zone, and
eight digits for signaling point codes.
In the signaling network, a signaling point communicates with other signaling points through
the signaling point code. The signaling point code identifies the signaling points that can
communicate with the signaling points in a signaling network.
To facilitate the management of the signaling network, the CCITT specifies in Rec. Q705 that
the international signaling network and other national signaling networks should be
independently deployed. Therefore, the signaling point codes are also independent. In Rec.
Q708, the plan of the international signaling point code is specified. In addition, the national
signaling point codes can be determined by the administrative department according to the
actual situations of each country.
Each country can adopt 14-digit signaling point code or 24-digit signaling point code as
required.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
Other NEs
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
135
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA

NA
1.10.12 MRFD-210801 Interface Message Tracing

Availability
Summary
This feature is used for interface message tracing in online/offline mode, tracing result review,
and routine equipment management.
Benefits
This feature simplifies the process of monitoring the signaling over the radio transmission
interfaces and facilitates network optimization and fault rectification.
Description
This feature is used for interface message tracing in online/offline mode and routine
equipment management.
With this feature, the GBSS/RAN can trace messages in real time, stop updating, save the
tracing messages, review the tracing result, and check the time when the message is sent. In
this way, the maintenance personnel can accurately locate and solve problems. In addition, all
the interfaces have the condition filtering function. Therefore, the maintenance personnel can
reduce the number of traced messages through condition filtering, improving the tracing
accuracy. Subscriber information such as IMSI, IMEI, IMEISV, MSISDN, and IP address in
traced messages is anonymized before being provided.
In the case of the GBSS system:
The BSSAP, MTP2, MTP3, and SCCP messages can be traced over the A interface as
required. The BSSAP messages can be filtered according to the message types such as the
BSSMAP, paging messages, and DTAP messages. You can also select the traced messages
according to the cell.
The RSL, OML, and LAPD messages can be traced over the Abis interface. The LAPD
messages can be filtered according to the site and TRX number. The RSL messages can be
filtered according to the message type, such as the measurement report, paging, and channel
request. The OML messages can also be filtered according to the message type.
The application layer messages and the LAPD messages can be traced over the Pb interface.
The LAPD message can be selected and traced according to the timeslot number. The
application layer messages can be traced according to the site number and the message types
such as paging.
In the case of the RAN system:
The operator can verify the configuration data, locate and solve problems by tracing the
messages over the Iu, Iub, Iur, and Uu interfaces. After the configuration data is set, the
operator can determine the correctness of the signaling links by tracing and interpreting the
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
136
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
messages over the Iu, Iub, Iur, and Uu interfaces. The operators can also locate exceptions
when exceptions occur.
Therefore, tracing and interpreting the messages over the Iu, Iub, Iur, and Uu interfaces can
take the place of the signal analyzer to perform the interoperability test between the RNC and
other network elements.
All the interfaces can filter the messages according to the message layer or the logical object.
In this way, the number of traced maintenance signaling messages can be greatly reduced.
Therefore, the tracing accuracy is improved and the problem location speed is accelerated.
Operators can also use this feature to optimize the network.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0
Supports the tracing over the Gb interface and the packet message tracing over the Um
interface.
GBSS8.1
Supports the tracing of the VGCS/VBS messages
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.13 MRFD-210802 User Signaling Tracing

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
137
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
With this feature, the signaling of an MS can be traced on the GBSS/RAN side. In a tracing
window, all the signaling of an MS in the GBSS/RAN can be traced. In addition, you can
manage the tracing task, save the messages, and review the tracing result.
Benefits
This feature facilitates the monitoring of specified MS's signaling and facilitates network
optimization and fault rectification.
Description
This feature allows users to type characteristic words of called MSs (including the IMSI,
TMSI, MSISDN, and IMEI) on the LMT or U2000 to trace the signaling of calling MSs. If
the ID anonymization function is enabled, users need to type the anonymized IMSI, MSISDN,
and IMEI. The host decodes the signaling of each call. If the MS information in the signaling
matches the characteristic words of the MS to be traced, the host returns the signaling of this
call to the OMC for display. With this feature, MSs' signaling over all interfaces can be traced,
saved, and viewed. This prevents a large number of signaling messages from being traced
over each interface. Therefore, the troubleshooting efficiency improves, facilitating problem
location.
Subscriber information such as IMSI, IMEI, IMEISV, MSISDN, and IP address in traced
messages is anonymized before being provided.
This feature supports signaling tracing for specified MSs. Based on the traced signaling
messages for specified MSs, operators can learn about the network status and optimize their
networks accordingly.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Supports the PS single user tracing and VGCS/VBS message tracing.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
138
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA

NA
1.10.14 GBFD-112203 Cell Tracing

Availability
Summary
With this feature, you can trace all the signaling of multiple calls in a cell. In this way, the
maintenance personnel can locate the problem in an efficient way.
Benefits
When you handle the voice problems, especially the problems related to the signaling
procedure and performance, you need to analyze the signaling on the A or Abis interface. The
common methods are drive test (DT) or dialing test. Together with the traced data obtained by
the signaling unit, the signaling can be analyzed. This process, however, is very complex and
expensive.
The cell tracing log facilitates to locate the network problem. You can directly trace calls in
the existing network and save the cost of the DT and dialing test for locating the problem.
Description
You can issue the cell tracing command on the U2000 to trace the calls of a specific cell. A
maximum of 16 calls in the specific cell can be traced at a time. The cell tracing feature
applies the first-in first-tracing principle. After a tracing task is started, the first accessed 16
calls in the traced cell are traced. If a call is complete, a newly accessed call is traced.
Subscriber information such as IMSI, IMEI, IMEISV, MSISDN, and IP address in traced
messages is anonymized before being provided. You can choose the cells to be traced on the
basis of the CELLID. The GBSC enables users to save and review the tracing log. You can
also choose to trace only the signaling on the A or Abis interface. When the message on the
Abis interface is traced, you can determine whether to trace the MR.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
139
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA

NA
1.10.15 GBFD-111301 LAPD Multiplexing at Abis

Interface
Availability
Summary
Each BTS has an operation and maintenance link (OML) that works at the rate of 64 kbit/s.
Each TRX has a radio signaling link (RSL) that works at the rate of 64 kbit/s. This feature
allows multiple RSLs and OMLs to be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the Abis
link in TDM transmission mode.
Benefits
Except for the timeslot 0 used for synchronization, there are 31 timeslots on one E1 link are
used for the signaling and service transmission. If the signaling compression technology is not
used, one E1 link can only carry the data and signaling of only 10 TRXs. In some areas where
the transmission resources are limited or expensive, saving transmission bandwidth is a major
concern of operators. This feature allows a maximum of 15 TRXs to be carried on one E1
link.
With the rapid development of data services, the transmission resources on the Abis interface
become more and more limited. For example, an EGPRS service with the MCS9 coding
scheme occupies four 64 kbit/s channels, and EDGE Evolution requires a higher bandwidth. If
the signaling and services are not compressed, the new services developed by operators will
consume a huge amount of transmission resources. This feature multiplexes the bandwidth
onto the signaling links and saves the transmission resources on the Abis interface.
Description
In Huawei BSC, the interface board connected to the BTS supports two multiplexing modes:
16 kbit/s sub-timeslot exchange and N:1 multiplexing. These two modes are targeted at the
RSL or OML signaling channels. The TCH adopts the exclusive mode. The full-rate speech
channel is 16 kbit/s and the half-rate speech channel is 8 kbit/s.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
140
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
If full-rate channels are configured in the TRX, the BSS allows the signaling of four RSLs to
be multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the E1 link. Then, the calls of multiple TRXs
can be carried on one E1 link, saving the transmission resources on the Abis interface. If 4:1
multiplexing mode is applied, Huawei BSS allows a maximum of 15 TRXs to be carried on
one E1 link.
If half-rate channels are configured in the TRX, the N:1 multiplexing mode is applied to the
Abis interface, where N can be 2, 3, or 4. The capacity of the speech channel doubles.
Therefore, the signaling volume on the RSL of each TRX is doubles. Therefore, the 2:1
multiplexing mode is used by default. That is, the RSLs of a maximum of two TRXs can be
multiplexed onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot on the E1 link. The multiplexing ratio is closely
related to the total number of TRXs that one E1 supports. Because the traffic volume on the
signaling channel in half-rate configuration mode is heavy, the recommended value of N is 2,
that is, 2:1 is the recommended multiplexing ratio. In this case, one E1 link supports a
maximum of 13 TRXs in half-rate configuration.
If the BTSs are cascaded, they can have different multiplexing ratios. For example, three
BTSs are cascaded in S1/1/1 cell configuration. Then, the multiplexing ratio of the level 1,
level 2, and level 3 BTSs can be set to 4:1, 2:1, and 4:1 respectively.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
When GBFD-117301 Flex Abis is enabled, N in the N:1 multiplexing mode can be set to
5 or 6 for a higher multiplexing ratio. For details, refer to the description of GBFD-7301
Flex Abis.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
141
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.10.16 GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception

(DRX)
Availability
Summary
Discontinuous Reception (DRX) means that the MS monitors the messages in the specified
timeslots according to the parameters configured in the system. This reduces the power
consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time of the MS.
Benefits
This feature greatly reduces the power consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby time
of the MS.
Description
If the MS in idle mode selects a cell as its serving cell, it can listen to the paging message in
the cell. The DRX is introduced to reduce the power consumption of the MS. That is, each
MS (corresponding to an IMSI) corresponds to a dedicated paging group. Each paging group
corresponds to a paging sub-channel of the cell. The MS can calculate its paging group
according to the last three digits of the IMSI and the configuration of the paging channels of
the serving cell, and therefore calculates the location of the paging sub-channel of this paging
group. In idle mode, the MSs of a paging group listen to the paging messages only on the
fixed paging sub-channel (during this period, it can also monitor the receive level of the
BCCH TRX of the non-serving cell) and ignore the paging messages on other paging subchannels or even shut down some hardware devices. This can reduce the power consumption
of the MS, provided that the necessary network message measurement task is implemented
within a certain period.
The number of paging sub-channels of each cell can be calculated according to the CCCH
type, BS AG BLKS RES (in 51 multi-frames, some data blocks are used for the AGCH
block), and BS PA MFRMS (the number of 51 multi-frames used for a paging on the paging
sub-channel).
In the GSM system, the CCCH is classified into the AGCH and the PCH. The main function
of the CCCH is to send immediate assignment messages and paging messages. The CCCH
can be borne by a physical channel or multiple physical channels. The CCCH can share a
physical channel with the SDCCH. The combination of the CCCH in the cell is determined by
the parameter CCCH CONF. The settings of CCCH CONF must be consistent with the actual
configurations. When the cell has only one TRX, it is recommended that the CCCH shares a
physical channel with the SDCCH (meanwhile, there are three CCCH message blocks).
In some cases, the paging traffic in an LA is excessively high, and one physical channel is
insufficient for sending paging messages. Therefore, the GSM specifications specify that the
BCCH TRX can be configured with multiple CCCHs, but the CCCHs can only be configured
on timeslots 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
142
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.17 GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management

Availability
Summary
BTS power management supports hierarchical power-off and voltage abnormal protection.
Benefits
This feature enhances power management and self-protection of the BTS, improving the
reliability of the system, prolonging the lifespan of products and serving time of the system.
With this feature, both the BTS stability and the QoS are improved. In addition, the O&M
cost for the BTS is reduced, increasing the revenues of operators.
Description
Huawei BTS can flexibly deal with the system load according to the actual situations,
prolonging the serving time of the system.
When there is no mains supply, the BTS hierarchical power-off function reduces the power
consumption and raises the duration of the storage battery. On one hand, when the mains
supply is not available, all the TCH TRXs are shut down except the BCCH TRX. This is
called soft shutdown. On the other hand, when the capacity of the storage batteries drops to
the preset value, all the TRXs are powered off automatically to protect the storage batteries.
This is called hard shutdown. The use of the automatic power-off mode is configurable.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
143
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
This feature mainly applies to the BTSs in cascading connection. When the mains power of
the upper-level BTS is powered off and the mains power of the lower-level BTS is normal,
this feature can prolong the working time of the transmission module of the upper-level BTS
to reduce the impact on the lower-level BTS.
When the working temperature is high or the temperature regulation unit does not work
properly, the TMU shuts down the power amplification of some TRXs if the temperature
exceeds the threshold in the cabinet. This prevents any negative impact on the system. If the
TRX is faulty or the VSWR exceeds the limit, to minimize the chance of total damage, the
TRX is allowed to quit the services and shut down the power, including the power of the
power amplifier. Whether this function is to be enabled and the parameters to be used can be
set. Therefore, the flexibility of the system is improved.
In this way, the power management and self-protection for the BTS are enhanced. Therefore,
the reliability of the system is improved and the lifespan of the products is prolonged.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.18 GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control

Algorithm
Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
144
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
Huawei enhanced power control algorithm is designed on the basis of Huawei network
optimization experiences. The enhanced power control algorithm has the following
characteristics: MR compensation, prediction filtering, dual-threshold power control
algorithm, variable step power control, adaptive power control, bad quality signal strength
upper threshold adjustment, and separate configuration for the uplink and downlink power
control steps. With all these characteristics, this feature improves the accuracy of the power
control and also ensures the stability and efficiency of the algorithm.
Benefits
Improves the effectiveness and accuracy of the power control.
Reduces the interference in the network.
Reduces the power consumption of the MS and BTS.
Increases the effective capacity of the network.
Improves the network operation quality.
Description
Power control is an important method for radio link control. The system decides whether the
transmit power of the MS and the BTS should be adjusted, based on the expected values of
the system parameters and MRs concerning uplink/downlink receive level and signal quality
received from the BTS. Power control on the radio link is aimed at reducing the transmit
power without sacrificing the transmit quality. In this way, power control is implemented
while the quality of the radio links is maintained. When the transmit power levels of the MS
or BTS are minimized, interference to other channels is reduced.
Power control procedure

The power control procedure involves MR preprocessing, power control decision, and
power control implementation.
Key technologies
MR compensation: The level in the MR is compensated to a level corresponding to the
current transmit power. In power control decision, the power control module extracts
several receive level values and receive quality values from history MRs. These MRs
may be obtained under different transmit power. Therefore, in order to ensure the
accuracy of the receive level, the receive level values from the history MRs must be
compensated if the transmit power in these MRs changes. Filter these MRs after
interpolation and compensation so that the power control decision is more effective.
Prediction filtering: An interval exists between power control decision and power
adjustment. Therefore, the MR on which the power control decision is based does not
accurately reflect the radio environment when power adjustment occurs, but misses the
latest changes of receive level and receive quality. Therefore, there is a delay for power
adjustment. Prediction filtering enables the MR on which the power control decision is
based to accurately reflect the radio environment when power adjustment occurs.
Therefore, the delay for power adjustment can be minimized. The principle of prediction
filtering is that the variation of receive level and receive quality maintains continuity in a
short period of time. Sample the preceding N MRs, and perform weighted filtering, and
then predict the subsequent zero to three MRs. Generally, the interval between power
control decision and power adjustment is 3 MRs (about 1.5s). Therefore, prediction
filtering can ensure the accuracy of prediction. Power control decision is implemented by
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
145
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
filtering the predicted MRs along with the interpolated MRs and compensated history
MRs.
Dual-threshold power control algorithm: The receive level can be within the scope of the
dual-threshold. The effect of both level and quality on power control is considered. This
improves the system flexibility and prevents the oscillation.
Variable step power control: This technology helps achieve quick and accurate power
adjustment. When the level or the quality is far from the expected value, large step of the
power is adopted for power adjustment. When the level or the quality is close to the
expected value, small step of the power is adopted for power adjustment.
Adaptive power control: This technology changes the power control strategy based on
the communication environment, making the power control effective and stable. This is
reflected in the following aspects: automatically changing the maximum variable step of
the power control based on the communication environment and adopting corresponding
power control strategy based on the communication environment.
Bad quality signal strength upper threshold adjustment: When the receive quality is
good, decrease the value of upper threshold of the uplink (downlink) level to reduce the
transmit power of the MS (BTS). When the receive quality is poor, increase the value of
upper threshold of the uplink (downlink) level to improve the voice quality.
Separate configuration for the uplink and downlink power control steps: This method
facilitates the flexible and rapid power control based on the actual situation of the
network. When the uplink (downlink) signal quality or the receive quality degrades
abruptly, the power can be adjusted upward quickly to prevent call drop.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
146
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.10.19 GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message Filter

Availability
Summary
This feature checks and completely deletes the DL DTMF messages on the user plane and
control plane of the Abis interface.
Benefits
This feature deletes the DL DTMF messages to ensure operator controlling the network.
Description
This feature shields the DL DTMF messages on the user plane and control plane of the Abis
interface. In this case, after the call is set up, the called cell phone will not receive DTMF
signals. By shielding DL DTMF signals, this feature enhances the GBSS network security.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
Support
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBFD-118602 A over IP
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1

Copyright Huawei
147
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.10.20 GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling

Availability
Summary
With this feature, N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7
signaling. A maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used.
Benefits
This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband
signaling. In addition, this feature saves the signaling point resources and reduces the
networking complexity while meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high
processing capacity of the BSC.
Description
With network expansion, development of new services, popularization of the short message
service and wireless intelligent network service, and increase in the traffic volume, the
signaling flow between different signaling points increases rapidly. According to the protocols
related to the SS7 signaling, a maximum of 16 signaling links are allowed between single
signaling points. If the 64 kbit/s signaling link is used, a maximum of 1 Mbit/s bandwidth can
be provided for a single signaling point in the entire system. This is far from the requirements
for the signaling link bandwidth when the BSC is in full configuration.
With this feature, N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7
signaling. Therefore, the bandwidth of a signaling link is extended to N x 64 kit/s and a
maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used. The high-speed signaling has the
following characteristics:
Large capacity
This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband
signaling, saves the signaling point resources, and reduces the networking complexity while
meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high processing capacity of the BSC.
Flexible bandwidth configuration
The bandwidth of the high-speed signaling link is N x 64 kbit/s, where N ranges from 1 to 31.
This enables the operator to flexibly configure the physical bandwidth according to the traffic
volume of the BSC, reducing the transmission cost.
Low delay
The high-speed signaling link uses bound timeslots to carry the signaling data. This
effectively reduces the transmission delay over the A interface when the traffic volume is low,
reducing the call establishment duration to some extent.
This feature is used together with the Local Multiple Signaling Points feature to support more
flexible signaling networking mode.
Enhancement
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBSS7.0
Copyright Huawei
148
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
This application enhancement supports the use of high-speed signaling in the MSC pool.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
Support
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
Other NEs
NA
NA
1.10.21 GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call

Availability
Summary
In the cells with heavy traffic, the emergency call procedure is enhanced to improve the
success rate of emergency call establishment.
Benefits
The success rate of emergency call establishment is guaranteed when the traffic in the
network is heavy.
Description
In most networks, the emergency call services specified by GSM specifications are
mandatory. Compared with a common call, an emergency call has a higher priority and faster
access capability. Therefore, the access rate and success rate of call establishment of the
emergency call is guaranteed. However, in emergency situations such as an earthquake,
tsunami, or flood, the traffic in the network is heavy. Hence, the emergency call service may
not be implemented due to the lack of resources.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
149
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
To avoid this circumstance, in the cells with heavy traffic, the emergency call procedure is
enhanced to improve the success rate of emergency call establishment.
To ensure that the TCH can be assigned to the MS that initiates an emergency call, the TCH is
preferentially assigned in the immediate assignment and the channel mode is modified during
service assignment. If no TCH is available in the immediate assignment, an SDCCH is
assigned to the emergency call and the channel preemption is performed. If the channel is
successfully preempted, the channel is reserved for the emergency call and then assigned to
the emergency call during service assignment. Therefore, even if the traffic is heavy in the
network, the success rate of emergency call establishment can be maximized.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
The eMLPP function must be enabled on the MSC.
NA

NA
1.10.22 GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the license limitation is withdrawn in emergencies so that the operator can
handle the sudden increase in network capacity.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
150
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Benefits
With this feature, the operator can temporarily withdraw the license limitation in the case of a
sudden increase in traffic volume due to natural disasters or holidays. Therefore, the
equipment can be used effectively to optimum capacity.
Description
The license limitation is withdrawn by manually running MML commands on the LMT or
U2000. Therefore, the equipment can be used effectively to optimum capacity.
For each R version, the operation personnel have three chances to withdraw the license
limitation by running MML commands. The operation takes effect immediately after the
commands are executed. The validity period is seven days. After the three chances are used
up, a new chance can be obtained only through the software upgrade.
For a GSM network, the licenses for all GBTSs under a BSC are managed by the BSC.
Therefore, the license limitation for both the BSC and the GBTS is withdrawn by manually
running MML commands on the LMT. However, GBTS(UMPT) licenses for all
GBTS(UMPT) are managed by themselves. Therefore, the license limitation for the
GBTS(UMPT) can only be withdrawn by running MML commands on the GBTS(UMPT).
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Impacted Features
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
151
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.10.23 GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control

Algorithm
Availability
Summary
This feature enhances and optimizes the GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm
feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the measurement report, power
control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold configuration.
Benefits
Improves the efficiency and accuracy of power control.
Reduces the intra-network interference and the power consumption of the MS and BTS.
Increases the network capacity.
Improves the network performance.
Description
Power control is an important method for radio link control. Based on the expected values set
for parameters and the MRs on the uplink/downlink receive level and receive quality sent by
the BTS, the BSC determines whether to adjust the transmit power of the MS and the BTS.
Power control on the radio link is aimed at reducing the transmit power while maintaining the
transmission quality.
The HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm feature enhances and optimizes the GBFD110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm,
interpolation of the measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of
threshold configuration.
Optimizing the filtering/interpolation of the MR

With this feature introduced, the incorrect MRs obtained at the initial stage of channel
access do not affect the power control algorithm and therefore the change in trend of the
transmit power of the MS can be predicted based on the MRs in a more timely and
correct manner.
Optimizing the decision algorithm

Based on the filtered receive level and receive quality, this algorithm considers the gain
of the radio channel from frequency hopping, improving the accuracy of decisions.
Setting the power control threshold according to the service type

This algorithm sets different power control thresholds for AMRFR services, AMRHR
services, FR services, and HR services to optimize the power control on the AMR.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Support implementing with "GBFD-110802 Pre-processing of Measurement Report."
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
152
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.24 GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full Rate

Availability
Summary
The enhanced full rate (EFR) is an improved speech coding scheme. The quality of the speech
using EFR is better than that of the speech using FR.
Benefits
User experience improves because the voice quality in the EFR scheme that uses the FR
channel resource approaches or even exceeds the voice quality in the adaptive different pulse
code modulation (ADPCM) scheme.
Description
The EFR is an improved speech coding scheme working at 12.2 kbit/s. The voice quality in
the EFR scheme that uses the FR channel resource approaches or even exceeds the voice
quality in the adaptive different pulse code modulation (ADPCM) scheme.
The EFR has good anti-noise performance. If the Um interface quality is good, subscribers are
provided with the voice quality as good as the voice quality provided by wired telephones
even when background noise is loud. Therefore, in the case of the same air interface quality,
subscribers can perceive better voice quality in the EFR than in the FR.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
153
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The EFR rate (12.2 kbit/s) is lower than the FR rate (13 kbit/s). Therefore, the EFR is not as
sensitive as FR to the bit error rate (BER). This ensures more reliable data transmission on the
Abis interface, which further improves the voice quality.
The EFR is compatible with the highest rate of the narrowband adaptive multirate (AMR).
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The EFR is forcibly enabled in A over TDM transmission mode.
If the EFR is supported by both the BSC and MSs but not supported by the MSC, the
EFR can be forcibly enabled on the BSC. In this case, the used speech version is shielded
on the MSC side to avoid assignment or handover failure.
The EFR is forcibly enabled to improve voice quality when the voice quality is poor.
GBSS13.0
E-coder is used in A over TDM transmission mode.
E-coder improves the EFR voice quality by using the filter enhancement technique
during preprocessing and the Linear Spectral Pairs (LSP) exact-calculate technique. Ecoder increases the mean opinion score (MOS) by 0.05 to 0.12 but introduces an
algorithm delay of 5 ms to an EFR encoder.
E-coder is not supported in A over IP mode or when TFO is enabled.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
CN
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
154
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.10.25 GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC)

Availability
Summary
This ALC feature identifies speech signals and adjusts the sound volume to stay within in a
comfort range, improving user experience.
Benefits
This feature can level out the difference between the sound volumes controlled by different
MS manufacturers and therefore balance the receive level adaptation of subscribers in
different areas. In this manner, the subscribers can perceive better voice quality.
Description
The ALC algorithm automatically controls the receive level. By evaluating the receive level
of input signals, the ALC feature controls the gains of the input signals, adjusts the output
signals to a certain target receive level, and maintains the stability and comprehensibility of
the signal receive level. This way, subscribers can perceive comfort sound volume and good
voice quality.
The ALC offers the following modes:
Fixed level mode

The receive level of signals is adjusted to a fixed target value based on the receive level
of the input voice.
Adaptive level mode

The receive level of signals is adaptively adjusted to a value within a pre-determined
range based on the receive level of the input voice.
Fixed gain mode

The sound volume of input signals is raised or lowered in a fixed proportion based on the
original sound volume.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The ALC algorithm performance is optimized.
GBSS12.0
The anti-clip (ACLP) algorithm is introduced.
The ACLP algorithm corrects the signals with relatively great amplitude, quickly repairs
the speech wave, and then adjusts the volume. This improves user experience.
The ACLP algorithm calculates the energy and spectrum characteristics of input speech
signals in real time. If too-high-level signals suffer from amplitude limiting and
experience distorted noises, the ACLP algorithm filters out distorted noises and performs
nonlinear volume adjustments to repair the signal wave according to spectrum
characteristics. In this manner, user experience with regard to the voice quality improves.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
155
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The function of measuring and collecting statistics on signal levels online is introduced.
The ALC algorithm can be used to measure and collect statistics on signal levels online
so that operators can monitor signal levels and learn the distribution of signal levels to
determine whether to enable the ALC algorithm for specific cells.
GBSS14.0
The level adjustment performance is optimized.
The speech tracing and adaptive capability of the ALC algorithm is optimized so that the
ALC algorithm becomes more responsive to situations where the volume changes
rapidly.
The internal dependencies on a fixed clipping threshold of the ACLP algorithm are
canceled so that the clipping threshold is adaptive to signal level changes.
A counter is provided to measure the signal level and the number of clipping
occurrences.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
Support
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Other NEs
Copyright Huawei
156
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
NA
GBFD-150201 A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch
GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch

This feature does not take effective if one of the preceding features is enabled for a
call.
1.10.26 GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo

Cancellation(AEC)
Availability
Summary
The AEC feature compares the major characteristics of the downlink voice with those of the
uplink voice after a period of delay to identify and cancel the acoustic echoes generated by
some MSs.
Benefits
This feature reduces the acoustic echoes generated by some MSs, improving the voice quality
and user experience.
Description
Acoustic echoes are generated when some sound waves from an MS speaker are reflected off
the microphone (MIC) and speech signals are sent back to the other MS because of the MS
characteristics. The acoustic echoes are generated by the MS because the MS speaker is too
close to the MIC and therefore the sound wave attenuation is insufficient.
During a call, the input voice from the MSC is retained when being transmitted on the AEC
module of the TC. After a period of delay, the remote input voice is compared with the local
voice from the MS. If the codes of similar characteristics exist, he local voice is considered as
the echo of the remote voice. Then, the echo is handled nonlinearly and replaced with comfort
noise. In this manner, the original voice from the MIC is canceled, and therefore user
experience improves.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The AEC algorithm performance is optimized.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBSS14.0
Copyright Huawei
157
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The accuracy of echo identification and cancelation is increased by 10%, which is

calculated by algorithm simulation.
The error detection rate (negative impact of echo cancelation on speech quality) is
decreased to 85% of the original, and the absolute error detection rate is less than 1%.
A counter is provided to measure the number of echo occurrences.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
Support
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
GBFD-115701 TFO

call.
1.10.27 GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint

(ANR)
Availability
Summary
The ANR feature suppresses background noise during a call to reduce the receive level of
noises, increasing the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
158
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Benefits
By suppressing background noise during a call, the ANR makes the voice clear, improving
user experience.
Description
The ANR distinguishes voice information from background noise based on the characteristics
of input speech signals in different time domains and frequency domains. Then, the ANR uses
a certain algorithm to reduce and suppress the background noise. By reducing the receive
level of the noise and increasing the SNR, the ANR improves user experience without
affecting the authentic voice.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The ALC algorithm performance is optimized.
GBSS14.0
The efficiency for suppressing noise of the same type for a second time and suppressing
unstable noise is improved.
The capability to distinguish voice signals and music is significantly improved.
A counter is provided to measure the number of times noise occurs at different levels.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
Support
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBFD-115701 TFO

Copyright Huawei
159
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features

call.
1.10.28 GBFD-115702 TrFO

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the calling MS and called MS use the same speech coding scheme.
Therefore, speech signals are coded at the calling MS once and decoded at the called MS
once. This prevents the transcoder and rate adapter unit (TRAU) from repeatedly coding and
decoding speech signals.
Benefits
Provides better speech quality for users because speech signals are coded and decoded
only once.
Saves TC resources because the TRAU is no longer used.
Repeated coding and decoding
Description
In an MS-MS call process where TFO and TrFO are not used, speech signals are coded
at the calling MS, transmitted on the Um interface, and then decoded at the first TRAU.
The decoded PCM data flow is transmitted on the 64 kbit/s link to the second TRAU for
coding and is then transmitted on the Um interface to the called MS for decoding. In this
process, the coding and decoding are performed twice.
TrFO overview
The TrFO feature enables the calling MS and called MS to use the same speech coding.
Therefore, speech signals are coded at the calling MS once and decoded at the called MS
once. This prevents speech signal damage in repeated coding and decoding, improving
the signal quality.
In the GSM network, the coding schemes supported by a cell can be dynamically
configured. The coding scheme over the Um interface is determined by the BSS. When
implementing the TrFO, the MSC server selects the speech version supported by the cells
where the calling MS and called MS are located. Then, the MSC server sets the expected
speech version to a highest priority. In this way, the TrFO can be successfully
implemented. The details are as follows:
The BSC selects the speech version recorded in the Preferred Codec List carried in the
assignment request sent by the MSC.
The BSC carries the coding schemes supported by BSC cells in a Complete Layer 3
Information message and sends the message to the MSC to improve the TrFO success
rate.
To perform the TrFO services on established calls, the MSC sends an INTERNAL
HANDOVER ENQUIRY message carrying the specified Speech Codec to the BSC to
trigger an intra-BSC handover.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
160
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Differences between TrFO and TFO

Both TrFO and TFO use the speech compression in the MSC, and they prevent the
repeated code conversions during an MS-MS call and improve the QoS. The two
features, however, are different from each other.
TFO is enabled, disabled, and controlled by the TRAU after a call is established. When
the encoder and decoder use the same coding/decoding scheme, TFO is enabled to
transmit the compressed speech.
TrFO does not require the TRAU. Instead, it uses the Out-of-Band Transcoder Control
(OoBTC) to negotiate the coding/decoding to be used by both the calling MS and called
MS before a call is established. Then, the compressed speech is transmitted after the call
is established.
If the requirement for TrFO is not met, it takes some time to configure the TRAU for
restoring the PCM coding/decoding. Without the TRAU, the call fails. In TFO, the PCM
coding is immediately used when the requirement for TFO is not met. Therefore, the
speech quality is not affected.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
The A interface must use the IP networking mode. An IP interface board is required.
BSC6910 Hardware
The A interface uses the IP networking mode. An IP interface board is required.
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
Other NEs
NA
BSC6900: GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1
BSC6910: GBFD-150201 A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing
GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MS Identification
GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution

call.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
161
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.10.29 GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise

Compensation (ANC)
Availability
Summary
The ANC feature evaluates the background noise level at the local end and the signal level at
the peer end. It then adaptively increases the speech volume at the peer end if the background
noise level at the local end is high. Therefore, this feature increases the ratio of the signal
level at the peer end to the background noise level at the local end, improving voice quality.
Benefits
Good speech quality is a basic requirement for a superior network. It is also the basic
requirement of the customer and helps in testing the product. The problems such as acoustic
echo, background noise, and packet loss must be solved to ensure the speech quality. In
addition, the gain of signals should be controlled. To solve these problems, different
manufacturers use different algorithms and features.
Huawei GBSS uses the ANC feature to improve the speech quality in the scenarios with loud
background noise such as in the downtown, marketplace, and cinema. Therefore, a network
with enhanced performance is provided and the user satisfaction improves.
Description
The ANC compensates the noise by using an algorithm. By estimating the background noise
at the local end and the speech level at the peer end, this feature adaptively increases the
speech volume at the peer end if the background noise at the local end is loud. Therefore, the
ratio of the speech level at the peer end to the background noise at the local end is increased
so that the listener can clearly hear the speaker.
This feature is disabled by default. The ratio of the speech level at the peer end to the
background noise at the local end can be manually configured. The maximum adjustment
range is the maximum gain of the ANC, which can also be manually configured.
The speech processing complies with the ITU-T G.169 standard
This feature is a feature is a TC-specific feature and cannot be used with TrFO or TFO.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
A counter is provided to measure the number of times SNRs occur at different levels.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
Support
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Copyright Huawei
162
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
GBFD-115701 TFO

call.
1.10.30 GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss

Concealment (EPLC)
Availability
Summary
This feature applies to the EFR, AMR FR, and AMR HR speech versions.
With this feature, the BSS uses an algorithm to restore and compensate the frames of lost
packets when receiving the speech coding. This improves the anti-interference capabilities of
the EFR, AMR FR, and AMR HR speech versions and the speech quality.
Benefits
Helps solve the problem of speech frame loss during transmission and in a poor radio
environment.
Provides a network with enhanced performance.
Improves the speech quality and user satisfaction.
Increases the MOS by 0 to 0.2 points in the case of packet loss of different severity.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
163
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
The problems such as acoustic echo, background noise, and packet loss must be solved to
ensure the speech quality. In addition, the gain of signals should be controlled. To solve these
problems, different manufacturers use different algorithms and features.
This feature uses the patented algorithm to restore lost frames during transmission and in a
poor radio environment based on the information about the previous frame. This implements
the compensation for the frames of the lost packets.
This feature is a TC-specific feature. It is used to process the AMR speech and controlled by a
switch. This feature cannot be used with TrFO or TFO because the TC is not involved in TrFO
or TFO.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
The packet loss prediction algorithm is optimized so that the received voice gets closer to
the original voice in fidelity, improving user experience.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
Support
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-115501 AMR FR, GBFD-115502 AMR HR, or GBFD-113301 EFR
GBFD-115701 TFO

call.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
164
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.10.31 GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC

Availability
Summary
The network side performs active power control for the MS supporting SAIC.
Benefits
In the GSM network, the MS can use only a single antenna because of the limitations in size
and cost. Therefore, the co-channel interference cannot be effectively suppressed and the
spectral efficiency of the GSM system is reduced. Some attributes of interference are known,
for example, channel modulation type and training sequence. Therefore, it is possible to
improve the anti-interference capability of the receiver. The anti-interference technology
called SAIC is defined in the 3GPP R6 protocol for the MS with a single antenna. SAIC can
enhance the anti-interference capability of the downlink, increasing the capacity of the GSM
system. With this feature, the network side performs active power control on the MS
supporting SAIC to reduce the interference of the entire network, expand the system capacity,
reduce the transmit power of the BTS, and save the power consumption.
Description
SAIC is an anti-interference technology for suppressing the co-channel interference and
adjacent-channel interference. The SAIC feature applies mainly to the MS with a single
antenna and is used to reduce the impact of the interference reception of downlink signals
through a signal processing technology. Compared with common mobile phones, the MS
supporting SAIC has stronger anti-interference capacity. The network can modify the power
control policy as required to reduce the transmit power of the BTSs, reducing the interference
in the entire network.
In downlink power control, the network checks whether the MS supports the SAIC. If the MS
supports the SAIC, the network decreases the upper downlink level threshold and the lower
downlink level threshold according to the Huawei III power control algorithm; the network
increases the UL Qual.Upper Threshold and UL Qual.Lower Threshold, according to the
Huawei II power control algorithm.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Copyright Huawei
165
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Support
MS
The MS supports this feature.
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.32 GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission

(DTX)-Downlink
Availability
Summary
The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink feature can reduce the power consumption
of the BTS and the frequency interference on the Um interface.
Benefits
This feature reduces the power consumption of the BTS and intra-system interference.
From the perspective of the entire network, this feature reduces the frequency
interference, increasing the network capacity.
Description
DTX consists of Voice Activity Detection (VAD) and Silence Descriptor (SID). In addition,
the GBSS automatically generates the comfortable noise to ensure the continuity of services.
VAD
When the Transcoder & Rate Adaptation Unit (TRAU) detests through the VAD module
that the data received from the MSC contains no voice information, it clears the voice
flag bit in the encoded TRAU frame. After identifying the flag bit, the BTS disconnects
the downlink until the flag is reset.
SID
The noise coding procedure is the same as the voice signal coding procedure. The SID
frame also experiences the channel coding, interleaving, ciphering, and modulating and
then is turned into the field containing the noise messages and sent out in eight
continuous bursts.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Comfortable noise

Copyright Huawei
166
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
When receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU also judges the SID flag. If the SID is set,
the MS is in the intermittent period. To make subscribers feel that the GSM provides
services continuously, the TRAU inserts comfortable noise in the uplink.
With this feature, the TRAU can reduce the power consumption of the BTS, frequency
interference on the Um interface. In downlink DTX mode, the GBSS equipment makes
subscribers feel that the communication is continuous by providing the MSs with comfortable
noise.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Configuring the DTX according to the voice coding: DTXs for different voice coding
can be configured separately. That is, you can enable the DTX for the FR (including FR,
EFR, and AMR) voice coding and the DTX for HR (including HR and AMR HR) voice
coding simultaneously, and you can also enable FR DTX or HR DTX separately. The
flexible configuration helps reduce the intra-network interference while maintaining the
voice quality.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.33 GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission

(DTX)-Uplink
Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
167
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
If the encoder of the MS detects through the VAD module that the received voice signal is
environment noise only, the MS periodically sends the SID, and then the TRAU restores the
comfortable noise accordingly.
Benefits
This feature greatly reduces the power consumption of the MS and prolongs the standby
time of the MS.
From the perspective of the entire network, this feature reduces the frequency
interference, increasing the network capacity.
Description
The uplink DTX can reduce the transmit power of the MS and the co-channel interference on
the Um interface.
DTX consists of VAD and SID. In addition, the GBSS automatically generates the
comfortable noise to ensure the continuity of services.
VAD
In uplink DTX mode, if the encoder of the MS detects through the VAD module that the
received signal is environment noise only, the MS periodically sends the SID. When
receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU also judges the SID flag. If the SID flag is set,
the MS is in intermittent period. In this case, the TRAU restores the comfortable noise
on the uplink to make subscribers feel that the communication is continuous.
SID
The noise coding procedure is the same as the voice signal coding procedure. The SID
frame also experiences the channel coding, interleaving, ciphering, and modulating and
then is turned into the field containing the noise messages and sent out in eight
continuous bursts.
Comfortable noise
When receiving the uplink frames, the TRAU also judges the SID flag. If the SID is set,
the MS is in the intermittent period. To make subscribers feel that the GSM provides
continuous services, the TRAU inserts comfortable noise on the uplink.
The uplink DTX can reduce the transmit power of the MS, the co-channel interference on the
Um interface and the power consumption of the MS, and prolong the call duration and
standby time of the MS. In uplink DTX mode, the GBSS equipment makes subscribers feel
that the communication is continuous by providing the MSs with comfortable noise.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Configuring the DTX independently according to the voice coding: DTXs for different
voice coding can be configured separately. That is, you can enable the DTX for the FR
(including FR, EFR, and AMR) voice coding and the DTX for HR (including HR and
AMR HR) voice coding simultaneously, and you can also enable FR DTX or HR DTX
separately. The flexible configuration helps reduce the intra-network interference while
maintaining the voice quality.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
168
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.34 GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the original TRX with high output power is replaced by two TRXs with
lower output power to reduce the power consumption of BCCH TRX while maintaining the
network capacity in low traffic periods. Therefore, this feature saves power for the BTS.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the BTS power consumption and therefore greatly reduces the
operational expenditure. The power consumption of TRXs constitutes a major part of the
power consumption of BTSs. In the existing network, however, the TRXs are not always
working. In low traffic periods, this feature can change the working status of TRXs to further
reduce the power consumption without interfering with the coverage and therefore bring
benefits to operators.
Description
The ICB applies to the DTRU only. The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH
carriers are idle, some channels on the BCCH carrier are idle in the cell, and the DTRU on the
BCCH applies the combination mode with physical connection. For example, the ICB can be
enabled in an S4 cell with single antenna, two DTRUs, and BCCH TRX in combination
mode.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
169
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
For an S4 cell, the output power of TRXs should be 30 W for the coverage requirement. In
normal cases, the TRX transmits at a high power of 60 W. After the combination mode is
applied, the output power is 30 W, which still meets the coverage requirement. In the existing
network, the traffic is low in some periods. When the timeslots on the BCCH carrier are idle,
the output power of the BCCH TRX is reduced to 15 W and the PBT mode is applied to
ensure that the combined output power retains 30 W. In this way, the TRX power is reduced
from 60 W to 15 W while maintaining the network capacity. This greatly reduces the energy
consumption of the TRX and therefore reduces the power consumption of the BTS.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012/BTS3012AE(QTRU), DBS3900 (RRU3008),
BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (GRFU), BTS3900B/BTS3900E do not support this
feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping)
GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell
1.10.35 GBFD-510604 PICO USB Encryption

Availability
Summary
A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. When a BTS3900B is locally commissioned, a USB
device is used to save the configuration file. The PICO USB Encryption feature enables the
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
170
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
encryption of the configuration file in the USB device so that the file is not displayed as plain
text. In this way, the risk of disclosure of the configuration file is reduced.
Benefits
The risk of disclosure of information because the files in the USB device are lost or stolen is
reduced.
Description
When a BTS3900B is locally commissioned, a USB device is used to save the configuration
file. This file contains important configuration information, such as the IP addresses of
network elements and IPsec keys. If the information is saved as plain text, it may be stolen or
disclosed.
After the PICO USB Encryption feature is introduced, the configuration file is encrypted by
using encryption software on the U2000 side and then is decrypted on the BTS side. In this
manner, the configuration file in the USB device is not displayed as plain text, ensuring
information security.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Only the BTS3900B supports this feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
171
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.10.36 GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell

Availability
Summary
A concentric cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. Different frequency
reuse patterns can be applied to the overlaid and underlaid subcells. In a concentric cell, PS
services can be evenly allocated to the overlaid and underlaid subcells according to different
policies to achieve load sharing.
Benefits
Increases system capacity without deteriorating voice quality by applying a tight

frequency reuse pattern to the overlaid subcell.
Improves CS service performance while ensuring PS service performance by using

appropriate PS load sharing policies.
Description
With the number of subscribers increasing, frequency resources do not meet the growing
capacity demand. Therefore, tight frequency reuse must be applied to increase frequency
usage and network capacity. Tight frequency reuse, however, may greatly increase
interference and even result in deterioration of voice quality. It is necessary to reduce
interference and ensure voice quality in the tight frequency reuse pattern.
The concentric cell technology divides a common cell into two service layers: overlaid subcell
and underlaid subcell.
For an MS in the underlaid subcell but not in the overlaid subcell, a TRX, such as the
BCCH TRX, in the loose frequency reuse pattern should be assigned.
For an MS in the overlaid subcell, a TRX, such as a non-BCCH TRX, in the tight
frequency reuse pattern should be assigned.
The tight frequency reuse pattern in the overlaid subcell improves the system capacity.
Compared with the MSs in the underlaid subcell, the MSs in the overlaid subcell are far from
the interference sources, and therefore the voice quality is guaranteed even if the tight
frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell. The voice quality of the MSs in the
underlaid subcell is also guaranteed when the loose frequency reuse pattern is applied.
When the capacity of the coverage area changes, the channels in the overlaid subcell and
underlaid subcell should be adjusted. For example, the traffic volume increases because a
large number of calls are made within a short period in the overlaid subcell. Adjusting the
TRX from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell can expand the capacity of the overlaid
subcell and therefore solve the problem of burst traffic increase. When the traffic volume
becomes light, the original settings are restored.
The BSS provides the power control, channel assignment, and handover algorithms regarding
the concentric cell to balance the traffic distribution in the concentric cell.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
172
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
Support for Main BCCH Configured in Overlaid Subcell: The BCCH can be configured
either in the underlaid subcell or in the overlaid subcell. The BCCH configured in the
overlaid subcell can increase the network capacity because the tight frequency reuse
pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell. When the BCCH is configured in the overlaid
subcell, the coverage area of the overlaid subcell must be equivalent to that of the
underlaid subcell. This can reduce failures in handovers from the overlaid subcell to the
underlaid subcell and reduce failures in overlaid subcell assignments, improving the
network performance.
Support for PDCH configured in Overlaid Subcell: The number of PDCHs increases
with the growth of PS services. This aggravates the TCH congestion in the underlaid
subcell. Configuring the PDCH in the overlaid subcell can absorb the PS services into
the overlaid subcell, minimizing the congestion in the underlaid subcell and increasing
the capacity of the concentric cell.
The parameters of concentric handover should be set for CS services and PS services
separately. This can implement timely handovers in CS domain and PS domain and
reduce call drops.
GBSS14.0
The following PS load sharing policies are supported:
Initial assignment or reassignment for PS services based on the frequency band
capability supported by an MS
Initial assignment or reassignment to the overlaid subcell based on the signal level
Initial assignment or reassignment to the overlaid subcell based on the TA value
Initial assignment or reassignment to the overlaid subcell based on the signal level and
TA value
The latter three policies ensure network quality after load sharing.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
173
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing
GBFD-114001 Extended Cell
GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation)
1.10.37 GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover

Availability
Summary
HUAWEI II handover algorithm is optimized from HUAWEI I handover algorithm. HUAWEI
II handover algorithm takes all results of handover decisions into account, obtaining more
accurate results of handover decisions.
Benefits
This feature improves the accuracy of the handover decision and increases the handover
success rate.
This feature enhances the network quality and improves the network KPIs.
Description
HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes account all results of handover decisions and candidate
cell list, and then generates the handover execution policy.
HUAWEI II handover algorithm is categorized into three handover algorithms: emergency
handover (directed retry, frequency offset handover, bad quality handover, TA handover, and
edge handover), intra-cell handover (interference handover, BCCH tight frequency
multiplexing in concentric cell, AMR handover), inter-cell handover (better cell handover,
enhanced dual band network handover, fast-moving handover, and GSM-to-UMTS inter-RAT
handover). All handover decisions are traversed in the handover decision phase. Unlike
common handover algorithms, HUAWEI II handover algorithm is not performed immediately
if the triggering condition of a handover is met during the traverse. However, only the
candidate target cell lists with handover decision type are generated independently. After all
handover decisions are traversed, HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes the intersection from
the candidate target cell lists corresponding to the handovers that meet the triggering
condition, and then generates the final target cell list for the handover. Compared with
common handover algorithms, HUAWEI II handover algorithm takes all results of handover
decisions into account, obtaining more accurate results of handover decisions.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
A handover penalty inheritance mechanism is added to the load handover. When a load
handover is successful, the penalty cell list from the source cell is inherited and therefore
ping-pong handovers are prevented.
Dependency
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
BSC6900 Hardware
Copyright Huawei
174
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-110801 Processing of Measurement Report or GBFD-110802 Pre-processing

of Measurement Report
GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover
1.10.38 GBFD-117101 BTS Power Lift for Handover

Availability
Summary
Before sending the handover command to the MS, the BSC adjusts the transmit power of the
BTS to the maximum value to prevent call drops due to rapid level drop.
Benefits
Reduces call drops, increases handover success rate, and optimizes KPIs.
Improves voice quality, prolongs call duration, and increases the operators' revenue.
Description
During the call, if the receive level drops rapidly, the handover is triggered to avoid call drops.
The power control algorithm, however, may fail to adjust the MS and BTS power in time.
Therefore, the MS fails to receive the handover command, which then causes call drops.
Using the BTS power lift for handover feature, the BSC can adjust the transmit power of the
BTS to the maximum value before sending the handover command to the MS to prevent call
drops due to rapid level drop.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
175
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA

NA
1.10.39 GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering

Algorithm
Availability
Summary
This feature is used when the voice, data, and signaling of the user are transmitted over the
Um interface.
Benefits
An evident advantage of the GSM system over the analog system is that the unauthorized
users are prohibited to access the network and the data of the authorized users is
encrypted through sophisticated ciphering algorithm, ensuring the communication
security.
The ciphering algorithm is referred to as A5 algorithm, which is a 114-bit ciphering

sequence according to the GSM specifications. The GSM specifications define eight
ciphering algorithms: A5/0-A5/7. With this feature, all the voice and signaling
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
176
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
information over the Um interface are transmitted in A5/1 or A5/2 ciphering mode. This
ensures the network security.
Description
The GSM specifications define eight ciphering algorithms: A5/0-CA5/7. A5/0 indicates "Not
encrypted". With this feature, all the voice and signaling information over the Um interface
are transmitted in A5/1 or A5/2 ciphering mode. This ensures the network security.
Ciphering procedure
The MSC uses the Cipher Mode CMD message (including the required ciphering
algorithms and the key Kc) to initiate the ciphering procedure through the BSC. Then,
according to the ciphering algorithm supported by the MS, the ciphering algorithm
required by the MSC, and the ciphering algorithm allowed by the BSC, the BSC decides
the algorithm to be used and notifies the BTS of the decision. The BSC then sends the
Ciphering Mode CMD message to notify the MS of the ciphering algorithm. After
receiving the Ciphering Mode CMD message, the MS initiates the transmission in
ciphering mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
CN
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.10.40 GBFD-115505 AMR Radio Link Timer

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
177
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
The radio link timer is used to detect the radio link quality. When the timer expires due to
poor radio link quality, the system deactivates radio channels and interrupts the conversation.
In this manner, the timer helps improve the channel efficiency and prevent poor-quality
channels from occupying radio channels for a long time.
Benefits
Prolongs the duration of the AMR voice service with high anti-interference capability
and therefore reduces the call drop rate by setting the radio link timer separately for
AMR and non-AMR voice services.
Improves user experience and increases the operators' revenue by prolonging the AMR
call duration in the network with poor radio link quality.
Description
This feature provides a special radio link timer for AMR calls. AMR calls enjoy higher
robustness than common calls. When a common call fails due to poor radio link quality, the
AMR voice service can maintain good conversation quality. If the radio link timers are set to
the same value for an AMR call and a common call, the AMR call is likely to drop and user
experience deteriorates. When this occurs, set the AMR radio link timer to a larger value so
that the AMR call endures the poor radio environment, reducing the call drop rate.
The radio link timers can be separately set for the AMR HR and the AMR FR.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
178
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features

NA
1.10.41 GBFD-113522 Encrypted Network

Management
Availability
Summary
The encrypted network management is related to the secure socket layer (SSL). This feature
allows the establishment of a TCP transmission channel between the network management
server and a network element (NE) based on the encrypted SSL.
Benefits
With the rapid development of the radio network, operators have higher requirements for
the OM transmission security. Therefore, the encryption of the OM transmission channel
becomes a basic requirement.
The encryption of the OM transmission channel involves the encryption of the data
transmitted between the LMT and the NE and of the data transmitted between the BSC
and the BTS.
This feature ensures the confidentiality of the data transmitted through the OM
transmission channel, therefore effectively protecting the privacy of the subscriber data
and reducing the risk that the transmitted plain text is intercepted.
Description
In many scenarios of the communication between the network management system and the
NE, a large amount of data is transmitted in the form of data files, including performance data
file, log file, configuration data file, version file, and patch file. The traditional plain text
transmission in the network is a threat to the secrecy of the transmitted data files.
With the encrypted network management feature, a transmission channel based on the
encrypted SSL is established between the network management server and the NE during the
establishment of the TCP connection. The data is then transmitted over this encrypted
channel.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
179
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The encrypted network management feature supports the transmission of plain text and cipher
text, and therefore does not affect the normal communication between the network
management server and the NE that does not support the encrypted SSL.
This feature complies with RFC4217, and supports two SSL protocol versions, namely,
SSL3.0 and TSL1.0.
Enhancement
GBSS15.0
Encrypted Network Management between the network management server and
GBTS(UMPT) is supported.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
180
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA

NA
1.11 Interface Features

1.11.1 GBFD-111801 Ater Interface 4:1 Multiplexing
Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSC supports 4:1 multiplexing on the Ater interface. The previous PCM frame of
64 kbit/s can be converted into the TRAU frame of 16 kbit/s to save the transmission
bandwidth.
Benefits
During network deployment, the transmission cost takes up much of the investment.
Assuming that the network quality is ensured, this feature can reduce the transmission
bandwidth in the following ways:
Through the configuration of the TC subrack on the MSC side (BM/TC separated mode),
the compression multiplexing is implemented to save the transmission bandwidth and to
reduce the transmission cost.
Operators can use the same amount of transmission investment to build a more reliable
network.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
181
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
Huawei GBSC supports 4:1 multiplexing on the Ater interface. That is, the four timeslots on
the E1 of the A interface can be multiplexed onto a timeslot on the Ater interface through the
Ater interface processing board.
In the telephone exchange network, the voice coding scheme is Pulse Code Modulation
(PCM) and the rate is 64 kbit/s. To save the radio channel resources, the GSM system adopts
the voice coding scheme RPE-LTP or CELP and the rate is 13 kbit/s (16 kbit/s for
transmission).
If the PSTN subscriber calls the GSM mobile subscriber, the voice codec is converted from 13
kbit/s codec to 64 kbit/s codec. The voice codec conversion is implemented in the TC
(TRAU) unit. Before conversion, the voice signals are exchanged and transmitted on the
channels of 16 kbit/s in the BSC.
The Ater interface is an internal interface between the TC processing unit and the service
processing module. On the Ater interface, Huawei GBSC supports the multiplexing of four
voice channels to an E1 timeslot of 64 kbit/s. When the TC subrack is configured on the MSC
side, the remote transmission resource can be saved by 75%.
Huawei GBSC supports the configuration of the TC subrack on the BSC side or on the MSC
side to provide the flexible networking for operators.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
Resource pool of the Ater interface: GBSS7.0 introduces the concept of the resource pool
of the Ater interface. The links on the Ater interface used as a resource pool can be
inconsistent with the CICs on the A interface.
This feature supports the Ater timeslot of 8 kbit/s (require the support from GBFD-6901
Flex Ater): the timeslots on the Ater interface involves the timeslots of 16 kbit/s and 8
kbit/s. When a call connection is established, according to the service type, the Ater
timeslots of 16 kbit/s are allocated if the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface; the
Ater timeslots of 8 kbit/s are allocated if the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface.
In this way, the resources on the Ater interface can be fully used and the resources can be
saved by over 75%.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
The BSC6910 does not support this feature.
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
182
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.11.2 GBFD-119001 Gb Interface Function

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the processing of PS services in the BSC, that is, the built-in PCU
function.
Benefits
The Gb interface is introduced to Huawei GBSS, which can support the processing of PS
services, that is, the built-in PCU function. The external PCU is not required. In this way,
the network elements are greatly integrated, the occupied space is smaller, and the
energy consumption is lower.
The processing specifications of the built-in PCU are greater than the processing
specifications of the external PCU. This helps operators to process PS services in an
efficient way.
The LMT is shared by the built-in PCU and the BSC. This reduces the O&M cost of
operators.
Description
For GBSS8.0 and later versions, PS services can be processed directly in the BSC, that is, the
built-in PCU function. As a basic feature, the Gb interface is introduced to support uplink and
downlink NS SDU transmission specified in the GSM specifications, load sharing, LLC PDU
transmission, packet paging, radio access capability indication, radio access capability update,
radio status indication, GPRS service suspension, recovery, Flush LL, flow control, and
BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC) blocking or reset.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
If a built-in PCU is used, a Gb interface board and a DPU board must to be configured.
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
183
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.11.3 GBFD-111803 A Interface Circuit Management

Availability
Summary
This feature is to control the maintenance of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits or the
whole PCM circuit group. When the TC subrack is configured on the BSC side, the circuit
management of the A interface can be performed directly.
Benefits
From the perspective of the O&M and transmission quality, the remote circuit management
enables the operators to provide the value-added services for subscribers and enhances the
network quality.
Huawei GBSS provides all the functions of the circuit management on the LMT, facilitating
the remote maintenance of the TC subrack such as the debugging and problem locating.
Compared with the independent O&M of the TC subrack, this feature improves the efficiency
of the O&M and reduces the O&M cost.
Description
Huawei GBSC supports the circuit management of the A interface, which involves the circuit
assignment, blocking, circuit group blocking, and unblocking of the A interface.
This feature provides the following functions:
Controls the maintenance of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits or the whole PCM
circuit group.
Provides the blocking or unblocking of the single circuit of the terrestrial circuits caused
by the intervention of the LMT or equipment fault.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
184
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Provides the blocking or unblocking of the circuit group of the terrestrial circuits caused
by the intervention of the LMT or equipment fault.
Provides the message retransmission mechanism when the terrestrial circuit management
message (circuit blocking, unblocking, or reset) is sent and no response is received
within the predefined period.
Supports the uninstalled circuit function.
Circuit assignment of the A interface:

During a call or the handover, the circuits of the A interface that are specified in the MSC
signaling can be allocated and occupied. After the circuits are allocated and occupied, the
BSC sends an Assignment Complete message to the MSC.
Circuit blocking:
When the circuit on the BSS side is unavailable, the BSC should notify the MSC that the
circuit is changed to unavailable. This process uses the circuit blocking function. The message
of the A interface blocking contains the circuit identification code (CIC) used by the circuits
of the A interface. The status of the circuits on both sides of the A interface keeps consistent
during the implementation of the circuit blocking function.
Circuit unblocking:
When the fault of the BSC is rectified or the circuit status is available, the BSC should notify
the MSC of the change in the circuit status. The message of the A interface unblocking
contains a circuit of the A interface, which is identified by the CIC.
Circuit group blocking:
When several circuits of the A interface need to be blocked, the command to block the circuit
group is used. The command includes multiple A interface circuits, which are identified by the
CICs.
Circuit group unblocking:
When several circuits of the A interface need to be unblocked, the command to unblock the
circuit group is used. The command includes multiple A interface circuits, which are
identified by the CICs.
Uninstalled circuit:
During the circuit blocking, unblocking, reset, assignment, incoming BSC handover, or BSC
reset procedure, if the specified circuit does not exist, the BSC sends an uninstalled circuit
message to the MSC.
Circuit reset:
When the local fault occurs on the system, use this function to restore the circuit status
information of the BSC or MSC (for example, abnormal SCCP connection release). If a
circuit becomes idle after abnormal SCCP connection release, the BSC notifies the MSC of its
status.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
BSC6900 Hardware
Copyright Huawei
185
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
Support
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.11.4 GBFD-111804 A Interface Protocol Process

Availability
Summary
Huawei BSS supports the A interface-based signaling and protocol processing, which is a
basic signaling function specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits
Huawei BSS supports the A interface-based signaling and protocol processing, which
conforms to the international protocol. With this feature, Huawei BSS can be interconnected
with the CN of other vendors that complies with the GSM specifications. In addition,
operators can perform the evaluation and bidding in an efficient way, preventing monopoly
and reducing the operation cost.
Description
Huawei BSS implements the A interface-based signaling and protocol process, which supports
the following functions:
Connectionless and connection-oriented SCCP services
RR layer connection, MM layer connection and message sending
Transparent transmission of the DTAP message on the A interface
Incoming/outgoing handover
Internal handover
Handover candidate query
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
186
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Paging procedure
Flow control
Traffic access control
Classmark update
Connection release
Encryption mode control process
MS message initialization
Data link control
Message check
Circuit group
Processing of abnormal SCCP connection
Queuing
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.11.5 GBFD-111805 A Interface Occupation Rate

Monitoring
Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
187
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
This feature is to monitor the real-time status and usage of the circuits on the A interface and
TC resources through performance measurement.
Benefits
A interface occupation rate monitoring is an important feature for ensuring the network
quality. This feature provides the following benefits for the operators:
Learn the usage of the circuit resources of the A interface in time, providing a basis for
the system capacity expansion.
Know about the distribution status of the circuit resources of the A interface in time.
Coordinate the configuration of transmission resources among different networks. Add,
reduce, and re-allocate the transmission resources on the basis of the usage of resources,
reducing the network operation cost.
Find the defects of the network planning, improving the principles and methods of the
existing network planning.
Description
This feature is to monitor the usage of the circuits on the A interface and TC resources
through performance measurement of the BSC.
The reports on the occupation rate of the circuit on the A interface and TC resources make the
operators know better about the usage of present resources.
When the circuit occupation rate exceeds the preset threshold, the system will automatically
report an alarm, reminding the user of expanding the capacity of the A interface according to
the actual situation.
The operators add or reduce the circuit resources of the A interface based on the usage of the
circuit resources of the A interface, providing better services for subscribers.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
Support
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
188
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.11.6 GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb

Interface
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the operator can deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas
that are difficult to reach using conventional transmission.
Benefits
This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide PS services in special
geographical areas or emergency conditions.
The satellite transmission resources over the Pb interface can be shared with other interfaces.
Description
This feature enables the operator to deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas
that are difficult to reach using conventional transmission. The PCU can be configured in the
CN equipment room and shared by multiple BSCs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
189
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.11.7 GBFD-116901 Flex Ater

Availability
Summary
When the Flex Ater feature is enabled, the Ater resources are allocated according to the
channel type during the call connection. If the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, the
16 kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used. If the TCHHs are allocated on the Um
interface, the 8 kbit/s timeslots on the Ater interface are used.
Benefits
This feature effectively reduces the transmission investment on the Ater interface in remote
TC networking. When the half rate accounts for 30% in the system, the Flex Ater-enabled
network saves the Ater transmission resources by up to 15%, compared with the Flex Aterdisabled network.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
190
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
The Ater interface is an internal interface between the GMPS/GEPS and the GTCS in the
Huawei BSS equipment. With this feature, the Ater resources are classified into 16 kbit/s
timeslots and 8 kbit/s timeslots.
The Flex Ater feature allocates the Ater resources according to the channel type during the
call connection. If the TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, the 16 kbit/s timeslots are
used. If the TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, the 8 kbit/s timeslots are used.
Therefore, the Ater resources are fully utilized.
The user can determine the initial proportions of the 16 kbit/s timeslots and the 8 kbit/s
timeslots based on the traffic module. If either type of resources is insufficient, the BSC
dynamically adjusts the Ater resources. If the 16 kbit/s timeslots are insufficient, two
continuous 8 kbit/s timeslots are incorporated into one 16 kbit/s timeslot. Similarly, if the 8
kbit/s timeslots are insufficient, one 16 kbit/s timeslot is divided into two 8 kbit/s timeslots.
The adjustment process is recorded in the traffic statistics. In addition, the user can query
using the LMT the number of the 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s timeslots of a specific subrack and the
usage of these timeslots. Based on the query result, the user can determine whether the initial
proportions of 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s timeslots are proper or the Ater resources are congested.
When this feature is enabled and the transmission resources on the Ater interface are
insufficient, the BSC preferentially allocates the half rate to alleviate the congestion,
increasing the system capacity.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
191
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.12 PS Services Features

1.12.1 GBFD-119101 Packet Channel Combination
Type
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the packet channel combination type specified in the GSM
specifications.
Benefits
This feature supports the packet channel combination type specified in the GSM
specifications.
According to the actual situation, operators determine whether to activate the PBCCH.
Then, adjust the rate of the PDTCH in a flexible way to perform the network planning
properly.
Description
According to 3GPP TS 43.064, the packet channel is classified into the following types:
Packet Broadcast Control Channel (PBCCH)

The PBCCH is used only on the downlink. It broadcasts specific system information. If
the PBCCH is not available, the BCCH takes the roles of system information
broadcasting.
Packet Common Control Channel(PCCCH)

The PCCCH is the logical channel of common control signaling of the packet data. It is
classified into the following channel types: PRACH, PPCH, and PAGCH.
Packet Random Access Channel (PRACH):
It is used only on the uplink. The MS requests to allocate the PDTCH on this channel.
Packet Paging Channel (PPCH):
It is used only on the downlink. The BSS pages the MS through the PPCH. The paging
group functionality is applied to the PPCH, and the DRX is also supported. The PPCH
can be used for paging in CS services as well as in PS services. However, the paging in
CS services is applicable to only Class A MS and Class B MS. When the MS is operating
in packet transmission mode, the PACCH can be used to page the MS that performs the
CS services.
Packet Access Grant Channel (PAGCH):
It is used only on the downlink. Before the MS starts packet transmission, the PAGCH
transmits the allocated resources to the MS, enabling the packet transmission. In
addition, when the MS is operating in packet transmission mode, the PACCCH can be
used to transmit the allocated resources to the MS on the downlink.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Packet Data Traffic Channel (PDTCH):

Copyright Huawei
192
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
It is used for the data transmission in PS mode. In multislot mode, an MS can use
multiple PDTCHs to transfer data.
Packet Dedicated Control Channel (PDCCH): It is classified into the PTCCH and the
PACCH.
Packet Timing Advance Control Channel (PTCCH)

It is used to control the timing advance of the MS.
Packet Associated Control Channel (PACCH)

It is used to transfer the signaling information. The signaling information consists of the
verification and the power control information. The PACCH also carries the information
about resource allocation and re-allocation, enabling the capacity allocation of the
PDTCHs or the addition of PACCHs in future. A PACCH can be allocated to one or
multiple PDTCHs of an MS.
This feature supports the following channel combination:
Combined PDTCH: PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH.
It is recommended that the PBCCH and PCCCH not be configured. This is because the
descriptions about PBCCH and PCCCH have been deleted from 3GPP TS 43.064,
45.001, 45.002, 45.008, 44.018, and 44.060 since Release 9.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Supports the PBCCH or PCCCH. The following channel combinations are supported:
Combined PBCCH: PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
Combined PCCCH: PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
193
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.12.2 GBFD-119102 Packet System Information

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the message types of the packet system information specified in the
GSM specifications.
Benefits
This feature supports the message types of the packet system information specified in the
GSM specifications and provides the packet access service.
Operators adjust the configuration parameters related to the packet system information in
a flexible way to control the operation of the network and the MS. For example, the
network operation mode enabled by the BSC and the access pulse type of the MS.
Description
Packet System Information (PSI) contains the primary radio network parameters of the Um
interface such as network identification parameters, cell selection parameters, system control
parameters, and network function parameters. The reception of the system information
enables the MS to select and access the network properly and to fully utilize multiple services
provided by the network.
The messages of the packet system information are transmitted on the BCCH or the SACCH.
The GPRS service support indication is carried in SI3, SI4, SI7 or SI8, and the parameters
related to the GPRS services are carried in SI13. The DTM support information is carried in
SI6.
SI13 is broadcast on the BCCH provided that the cell supports GPRS services. The
configuration of the PBCCH is optional for a cell. SI13 is received by the MS, indicating
whether the PBCCH is configured in a cell. The PBCCH mainly broadcasts the messages of
the GPRS packet system information.
Messages of the packet system information are PSI1, PSI2, PSI3, PSI3bis, and PSI13.
PSI1: Mainly contains the information about the cell selection, PRACH control, control
channel, and power control parameter.
PSI2: Mainly contains the information such as the reference frequency list, cell allocation
table, GPRS mobile allocation table, and PCCCH description.
PSI3: Mainly contains the information about the BCCH allocation list of the neighboring cell
and cell selection parameters of the serving cell and non-serving cell. PSI3bis: Mainly
contains the information about the BCCH allocation list of the neighboring cell and cell
selection parameters of the non-serving cell.
PSI13: Like SI13 broadcast on the BCCH, this message mainly contains the access-related
information associated with the GPRS cells.
PSI1-CPSI3: These messages can be broadcast on the PBCCH or the PACCH. PSI13 can be
broadcast only on the PACCH.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
194
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
If the PBCCH is available in a cell, then the PSI13 is not broadcast on the PACCH. In the case
of the MS in the transmission state, PSI1 is periodically broadcast on the PACCH. If the
PBCCH is not available in a cell, then only PSI13 is periodically broadcast on the PACCH.
Huawei BSS allows the transmission of all GPRS-related system information, enabling the
controlling retransmission, high-speed retransmission, and low-speed retransmission of the
system information. In addition, Huawei BSS controls the transmission of the system
information on the PACCH based on the actual configuration of the PBCCH or the PCCCH in
a cell.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The DTM support information is carried in SI6.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.12.3 GBFD-119103 MS Types

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the MS types specified in the GSM specifications.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
195
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Benefits
This feature is a basic feature for operators to use the built-in PCU to perform PS
services.
This feature supports different types of the MSs specified in the GSM specifications to
perform PS services.
Description
Huawei BSC supports the following MS types:
Class A MS:
The class A MS supports simultaneous attach of GPRS and IMSI, and the MS supports
simultaneous operation of GPRS and CS services.
Class B MS:
The class B MS supports simultaneous attach of GPRS and IMSI, but the MS can perform
only one service at a time.
Class C MS:
The class C MS can access only the GSM or GPRS network at a certain time. If the MS
supports both PS and CS services, the services can be only switched over manually and
cannot be implemented simultaneously.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
Copyright Huawei
196
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features

NA
1.12.4 GBFD-119104 MAC Mode

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the MAC mode specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits
services.
This feature supports the MAC mode specified in the GSM specifications. After the MS
accesses the network, the USF is scheduled to ensure that the PS services of the MS are
processed continuously and multiple MSs can be multiplexed on a PDCH.
Description
Huawei GBSS supports two MAC modes: dynamic allocation and extended dynamic
allocation. This feature supports dynamic allocation.
Dynamic allocation
The MS in the ready state obtains the USF information by decoding RLC/MAC headers,
and then determines whether an uplink radio block or a group of uplink radio blocks are
used to transmit data on the PDCH during the period of transmitting the next block. In
this way, the BSS can control the uplink access of multiple MSs on a timeslot.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
CN
Copyright Huawei
197
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
GBFD-119401 EDA
Extended dynamic allocation requires GBFD-119401 EDA.

NA
1.12.5 GBFD-119105 RLC Mode

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the RLC mode specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits
services.
This feature determines the RLC mode and establishes PS services based on the
information contained in the uplink packet resource request sent by the MS or LLC PDU
sent by the CN.
Description
Two RLC modes are supported: RLC acknowledged mode and RLC unacknowledged mode.
The RLC mode of the uplink TBF is dependent on the type of the service requested by the
MS; the RLC mode of the downlink TBF, however, is dependent on the RLC mode of the
QoS parameters contained in the downlink LLC PDU.
RLC acknowledged mode: In this mode, the receiver acknowledges the received RLC data
blocks, and each data block transmitted on the TBF should be acknowledged; otherwise, the
sender shall resend the lost blocks. Each data block transmitted on the TBF should be
acknowledged until the transmission of all the data is complete and acknowledged. In this
case, the TBF can be released. This mechanism ensures the transmission reliability of the
RLC data blocks.
RLC unacknowledged mode: In this mode, the receiving party acknowledges the received
RLC data blocks as in RLC acknowledged mode. The data block, however, does not require
the acknowledgment from the sending party. The lost data or erroneously transmitted data are
replaced by filling bits. After the data transmission is complete, the TBF can be released.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
198
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.12.6 GBFD-119106 Coding Scheme

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the GPRS CS coding schemes specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits
services.
This feature supports GPRS CS-1 and CS-2 specified in the GSM specifications.
Description
According to GSM specifications, the GPRS can use four coding schemes: CS-1, CS-2, CS-3,
and CS-4. CS-1 and CS-2 have a data rate of 9.05 kbit/s and 13.4 kbit/s (containing the header
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
199
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
of the RLC block). This ensures 100% and 90% cell coverage, meeting the co-channel
interference requirement of C/I = 9 dB.
The requirements for the radio transmission quality vary with the transmission rate of the
coding schemes. The higher the transmission rate, the higher the requirements for the radio
transmission quality. The half-rate and 1/3 rate bits in the RLC blocks of CS-1 and CS-2 are
used for the forward error correction (FEC). Therefore, the C/I requirement is reduced.
During the data transmission, the BSC dynamically adjusts the channel coding or decoding
mode according to the retransmission rate of the RLC blocks transmitted on the uplink or
downlink TBF. This improves the transmission rate on the basis of guaranteed transmission
quality, fully utilizing the radio resources.
This feature supports CS-1, CS-2, and dynamic adjustment between CS-1 and CS-2.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.12.7 GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the network control mode specified in the GSM specifications.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
200
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Benefits
services.
This feature supports the network control mode specified in the GSM specifications.
Operators can adjust the network control mode according to the different cell reselection
policies.
Description
The following describes three network control modes in cell reselection concerning the
relationships between the MS, network, and MR.
NC0: In this mode, the MS performs autonomous cell reselection without sending the MR to
the network.
NC1: In this mode, the MS performs autonomous cell reselection and sends the MR to the
network.
NC2: In this mode, the network controls the cell reselection and the MS sends the MR to the
network. In this case, the MS does not perform autonomous cell reselection.
This feature supports both NC0 and NC1.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
201
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.12.8 GBFD-119108 Network Operation Mode

Support
Availability
Summary
This feature supports Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode III specified
in the GSM specifications.
Benefits
services.
This feature supports Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode III
specified in the GSM specifications. In this way, operators can adjust the network
operation mode according to different networking modes and paging policies.
Description
The GSM specifications define three network operation modes according to the paging mode
adopted for CS and GPRS services: Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation Mode II,
and Network Operation Mode III.
Network Operation Mode I:
The BSS sends the CS paging message and the PS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS
on the PCH of the CCCH or the PPCH of the PCCCH. In this case, the MS listens to only the
PCH or the PPCH. If the PDCH is allocated to the MS, then the BSS sends a CS paging
message to the MS on this channel provided that the Gs interface is used and the paging
coordination function is enabled.
Network Operation Mode II:
The BSS sends the CS paging message and the PS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS
on the PCH of the CCCH. In this case, the MS listens to only the PCH of the CCCH and the
paging coordination function is not required.
Network Operation Mode III:
The BSS sends a CS paging message to the GPRS-attached MS on the PCH of the CCCH. If a
PPCH is configured in a cell, the PS paging message is sent on this channel. Otherwise, the
PS paging message is sent on the PCH of the CCCH. If a PPCH is configured in a cell, the
MS should listen to the CS paging channel and PS paging channel simultaneously. In this
case, the paging coordination function is not required.
Network
Operation
Mode
CS Paging
Message
GPRS Paging
Message
Paging
Coordination
PPCH
PPCH
Required
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
202
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Network
Operation
Mode
CS Paging
Message
GPRS Paging
Message
Paging
Coordination
PCH
PCH
PACCH
Not used
II
PCH
PCH
Not required
III
PCH
PPCH
Not required
PCH
PCH
The network operation mode is sent to the MS through the system information. In addition,
the network operation modes should be consistent in a routing area (RA).
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.12.9 GBFD-119109 QoS (Best Effort)

Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
203
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
This feature supports the quality of service (QoS) (Best Effort) specified in the GSM
specifications.
Benefits
services.
This feature allocates more resources to the MS, and improves the packet throughput of
the MS, meeting the requirements of the QoS.
Description
The Quality of Service (QoS) of the GPRS network contains the following specifications:
priority, delay level, reliability level, peak throughput level, average throughput level, and
guaranteed bit rate. Each specification can be further divided into multiple levels. These
specifications are end-to-end requirements of the entire packet data transfer. The
specifications involve the radio resources, trunk link resources on the Gb interface or IP
transmission resource, transmission bandwidth of the GPRS backbone network, and
processing capability of different GPRS devices.
Huawei BSC6000 allocates more resources to the MS with best effort QoS. In addition, the
BSC6000 adopts the polling scheduling mode to balance the bandwidth for multiple MSs that
are multiplexed on a packet channel.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBFD-114101 GPRS
Copyright Huawei
204
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.12.10 GBFD-119110 Access

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the packet access specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits
services.
This feature supports the packet access initiated by the MS that is specified in the GSM
specifications.
Description
The RLC/MAC layer of an MS initiates a packet access if the MS needs to transmit data. The
packet access of an MS has the following types: short access, one-phase access, two-phase
access, and single block access without TBF establishment.
Access type selection

If less than eight RLC blocks are transmitted, the channel request type of the MS is short
access. The number of blocks should be calculated on the basis of CS-1. If more than
eight RLC blocks are transmitted and the requested RLC mode is the acknowledged
mode, the channel request type of the MS should be one-phase access or two-phase
access. If the data to be sent is an MR, then the channel request type of the MS should be
single block access without TBF establishment. The following channel request types are
also defined: paging response, cell update, and mobility management. These channel
request types are generally processed in one-phase access or two-phase access manner.
Access procedure
Short access and one-phase access: Radio resources such as TFI and USF are allocated to
the MS after the BSS receives a Packet Channel Request message.
Two-phase access: A radio block is allocated to the MS after the BSS receives a Packet
Channel Request message. The MS sends a Packet Resource Request message on the
allocated radio block to request resources. Upon reception of this message, the BSS
allocates resources such as TFI and USF to the MS. Then, the MS sends data on the
allocated resources.
The Packet Channel Request message is an 8-bit or 11-bit access burst, which carries a
small amount of information. The Packet Resource Request message, however, is an
RLC/MAC signaling packet in CS-1 coding scheme. Therefore, the two-phase access can
carry relatively more information (including the TLLI, multislot capability of the MS,
and radio priority). This helps allocate appropriate resources to the MS.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
205
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.12.11 GBFD-119111 Assignment

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the packet assignment procedure specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits
services.
This feature supports the PS services initiated by the network or MS.
Description
The packet assignment is a process for allocating packet radio resources to the MS and
establishing TBF. Huawei BSS supports the uplink or downlink assignment on the CCCH or
PACCH.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
206
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Uplink assignment on the CCCH:

When the MS in packet idle mode (no TBF available) initiates an uplink access, the BSS
allocates resources to the MS to establish an uplink TBF after receiving a Packet Channel
Request message (one-phase access) or a Packet Resource Request (two-phase access) on the
CCCH.
Uplink assignment on the PACCH:
When the MS is in downlink packet transfer mode, it sends a DOWNLINK ACK message
containing the uplink channel request to request the establishment of the TBF. Upon reception
of this message, the BSS allocates resources to the MS to establish an uplink TBF.
Downlink assignment on the CCCH:
When the MS is in packet idle mode (no TBF available), the BSS allocates resources to the
MS on the CCCH to establish the downlink TBF after receiving an LLC PDU that is sent
from the SGSN to the MS.
Downlink assignment on the PACCH:
When the MS is in uplink packet transfer mode (uplink TBF available), the BSS allocates
resources to the MS on the PACCH to establish the downlink TBF after receiving an LLC
PDU that is sent from the SGSN to the MS.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
207
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.12.12 GBFD-119112 PS Paging

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the GPRS PS paging procedure specified in the GSM specifications.
Benefits
services.
This feature supports the basic GPRS PS paging procedure, which can establish a packet
call initiated by the network.
Description
When the downlink data is sent to the MS, the SGSN needs to initiate a PS paging procedure
to accurately locate the MS.
The SGSN sends a paging request message to the BSC on the Gb interface. Then, the BSC
converts this message into the Packet Paging Request message and sends it to the MS. If the
PCCCH is available in the BSC, this message is sent on the PPCH; if the PCCCH is not
available in the BSC, this message is sent on the PCH.
Upon reception of the Packet Paging Request message, the MS initiates the procedure for
establishing an uplink TBF. Then, the MS sends the paging response packet in data form to
the BSC on the Um interface and the BSC forwards it to the SGSN. After the SGSN receives
the paging response packet, the downlink data is transmitted provided that the paging
response packet is processed.
PS paging on the CCCH

In Network Operation Mode II, the PS paging is sent on the CCCH.
In Network Operation Mode III, the PS paging is sent on the CCCH if the PCCCH is not
configured in the cell.
CS paging on the CCCH

In Network Operation Mode II or Network Operation Mode III, the CS paging is sent on
the CCCH.
This feature supports the paging in Network Operation Mode II and Network Operation Mode
III.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
208
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
To implement paging coordination, the MSC must support the Gs interface.
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.12.13 GBFD-119113 Timing Advance Update

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the timing advance (TA) update procedure specified in the GSM
specifications.
Benefits
services.
This feature supports the basic TA update procedure to ensure that the MS can obtain the
correct TA and keep the continuity of the packet call.
The TA is a basis for the feature of the packet concentric cell handover.
Description
Huawei BSC6000 supports the continual TA update on the packet timing advanced control
channel (PTCCH). In the uplink or downlink assignment message, the BSC allocates TAI to
the MS to identify the PTCCH. The MS periodically sends a random access burst on the
specified uplink PTCCH and the BSS obtains the TA from the burst and sends it to the MS on
the downlink PTCCH.
During the initial establishment of the TA, the BSS obtains the TA from the Packet Channel
Request message sent by the MS, and sends the Packet Uplink/Downlink Assignment
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
209
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
message containing the TA to the MS. The MS uses this TA until the continual timing advance
update procedure is complete and a new TA is obtained.
TA of packet downlink assignment: If no valid TA can be obtained through the downlink
assignment, the BSS sends the packet POLLING message and obtains the TA from the
random access burst that is used by the MS.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.12.14 GBFD-119115 Power Control

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the uplink open-loop power control procedure specified in the GSM
specifications.
Benefits
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
210
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
services.
This feature supports the uplink open-loop power control procedure specified in the
GSM specifications.
Based on the adjustment of the parameter configuration, operators can reduce the MS
power consumption and interference in an efficient way and improve the system
capacity.
Description
This feature improves the usage of frequencies, increases the system capacity, and reduces the
power consumption of the MS. Because there is no continuous bi-directional connection
during the transmission of packet data, the power control of the GPRS is more complex.
Huawei BSC6000 provides the uplink open-loop power control algorithm. The formula of the
algorithm complies with 3GPP TS 45.008.
The basic principle of the open-loop power control is to assume that the path loss in the uplink
is the same as the path loss in the downlink. Therefore, the MS can adjust the output power
based on the receive level.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
211
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.12.15 GBFD-119116 Packet Uplink Flow Control

Availability
Summary
This feature is to effectively control the random access on the PRACH or the RACH by
prolonging the retransmission interval of the random accesses or prohibiting the access of the
MSs of a certain access class.
Benefits
services.
This feature ensures the capacity of the BSC and the service quality on the basis of the
reasonable flow control of the random access on the PRACH or the RACH.
Description
If excessive MSs request GPRS resources within a cell or BSC at the same time, the GPRS
resources may be insufficient and the uplink may be congested.
The uplink flow control is used to control the service requests (including the response to
paging) that are initiated by the MS, and to delay the response to these service requests. The
control of uplink service requests is implemented through the control of the number of
random access requests on the PRACH/RACH. The delay of the response to the service
requests initiated by the MS is implemented in the queue indication procedure.
Decreasing the number of random access requests on the PRACH/RACH is implemented
through prolonging the random access retransmission interval or prohibiting the access of the
MSs of a certain class. Prolonging the retransmission interval of the random access may affect
the response speed and service quality of the system but it helps improve the capacity of the
system. Therefore, it is applicable to some suitable situations. Prohibiting the MSs of a certain
access class may affect the service quality of the system.
In addition, Huawei BSC6000 handles the overload in a policy from the service perspective
and the operation perspective. For different types of overloads, there are different handling
policies.
For example, for the overload of radio resources, the system reduces the load to be processed
on the basis of priorities by performing the following steps until the overload problem is
solved:
Delay the response to the access request with low QoS or reject the access request with
low QoS.
Release the TBF of the MS with low QoS.
Take turns to block the MSs of a certain class from accessing the network.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
212
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control

NA
1.12.16 GBFD-119117 Flow Control on Gb Interface

Availability
Summary
This feature supports the procedure for the flow control on the Gb interface.
Benefits
services.
On the basis of the flow control policy of the Gb interface and the parameter
configuration, this feature prevents frequent data loss caused by the congestion on the Gb
interface or the transmission interruption caused by insufficient flow.
This feature enhances the user experience and ensures the packet throughput of the BSS.
Description
Because the physical media and transmission protocols on the Gb interface are different from
those on the Um interface, the two interfaces have different data transmission rates. The data
rate on the Gb interface is greater than that on the Um interface. In addition, the data
transmission rate in the downlink on the Um interface is subject to various factors such as the
multislot capability of the MS, radio quality, and radio channels available in the cell. In
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
213
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
addition, the data transmission rate is unstable. Therefore, the flow control of downlink data is
required.
When the cell status is normal, the BSC initiates the flow control procedure. The BSC reports
the bucket size and rate of the cell according to the radio packet channels in the cell. In
addition, the BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the MS according to the resource
occupation of the MS. Based on the reported parameters, the SGSN adjusts the downlink data
rates of the cell and of each MS to implement the flow control.
The bucket of a cell refers to the maximum packet data storage space that is reserved for the
cell. The bucket varies according to the number of packet channels in the cell.
The bucket of an MS refers to the maximum packet data storage space that is reserved for the
MS. The bucket varies according to the number of channels that are allocated to the MS.
When the cell status is normal, the BSC initiates the flow control procedure. The BSC reports
the bucket size and rate of the cell according to the radio packet channels in the cell. In
addition, the BSC reports the bucket size and rate of the MS according to the resource
occupation of the MS. Based on the reported parameters, the SGSN adjusts the downlink data
rates of the cell and of each MS to implement the flow control.
The bucket rate refers to the data transmission rate. The BSC can perform data flow control in
the downlink. It periodically reports the bucket sizes and rates of the current cell and of an
MS to the SGSN and adjusts the reported parameters based on the changes in cell packet
resources and in the resource occupation of the MS.
Downlink flow control involves downlink BVC flow control and downlink MS flow control:
Downlink BVC flow control:

The BSC reports flow control parameters, such as the maximum bucket size and the leak
rate of the BVC, to the SGSN.
Downlink MS flow control:

The SGSN reports flow control parameters, such as the maximum bucket size and the
leak rate of the MS, to the SGSN.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
214
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.12.17 GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment

Availability
Summary
With this feature, fixed channels do not need to be configured for the PS services, the TCH
and the PDCH can be automatically converted as required.
Benefits
Reduces the impact of GPRS services on the GSM speech services, decreases the
maintenance and configuration workload, and increases channel usage and network
capacity.
Improves the performance of the PS services and increases the operators' revenue.
Packet channel types
Description
The PDCH is classified into static PDCH and dynamic PDCH based on the bearer
services (CS services or PS services).
The static PDCH is used for the PS services only.
The dynamic PDCH is a TCH during the initialization process. In the case of packet
access, the TCH and the PDCH can be dynamically converted.
PDCH dynamic adjustment

The static PDCH is used for the PS services only. The dynamic PDCH is a TCH during
the initialization process. When the packet resources are insufficient, the PCU requests
dynamic PDCHs from the BSC for the PS services. When the circuit resources are
insufficient, the BSC requests dynamic PDCHs that are used as TCHs from the PCU.
In this manner, the channel resources are flexibly used as required. Therefore, the usage
of resources is increased, and the complexity of PDCH configuration and the workload
of maintenance and configuration are reduced. In addition, the impact of unreasonable
PDCH configuration on the service performance is reduced.
Enhancement
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBSS7.0

Copyright Huawei
215
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
PDCH Preemption Priority: In the latter period of the GSM network development, the
requirements for the PS services are preferentially met because of the significant increase
in the data service demand. Huawei PCU equipment supports three types of PDCH
preemption priorities: all dynamic channels preemptable, packet control channels
unpreemptable, and all dynamic channels carrying services unpreemptable. This
application enhancement optimizes the performance of the PS services by limiting
channel preemption of the CS services. The operators can implement different packet
allocation strategies by configuring preemption priority.
All dynamic channels preemptable: The CS services can preempt all dynamic channels.
Packet control channels unpreemptable: The CS services can preempt all the other
dynamic channels except the packet control channels.
All dynamic channels carrying services unpreemptable: The CS services cannot preempt
all the dynamic channels carrying services.
GBSS8.0
Overall Dynamic PDCH Availability: Except for static PDCHs, all the other channels
can be converted in real time based on the situation of the PS services and the CS
services. If required, TCHs can be converted to PDCHs for the PS services. With this
application enhancement, more PDCHs can be converted when the CS services are not
busy. This can alleviate the decrease in the transmission rate due to PDCH multiplexing.
This flexible mechanism can maximize the channel usage and optimize the distribution
of PDCHs and TCHs. In addition, the network planning is simple and therefore you can
expand the capacity if required.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Support
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
216
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.12.18 GBFD-119205 Dynamically Adjusting the

RRBP Frequency
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the relative reserved block period (RRBP) frequency is dynamically
adjusted according to the status of the uplink TBF and the downlink TBF. The data blocks
with the RRBP flag in the downlink are sent at different intervals.
Benefits
Optimizes the uplink access rate of PS services, improving the performance of the TCP
services such as FTP downloading by increasing the rate of sending the TCP ACK
message. As a result, user experience is enhanced.
Reduces unnecessary data flow in the uplink and the impact on other users on the same
PDCH.
Description
This feature optimizes the RRBP frequency based on the whether uplink TBF exists during
the delayed downlink TBF release.
Uplink TBF status and RRBP frequency

During the downlink transmission process, the BSC periodically sends data blocks with
RRBP flag to reserve uplink resources for the MS to respond with the PACKET
DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message to report the receiving status of the downlink data.
When the MS needs to send data in the uplink but the uplink TBF does not exist, the MS
can carry the channel request information in the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK
message to initiate the access. Therefore, if the frequency of sending the data blocks with
RRBP flag is increased at this time, the access rate of the MS can be increased.
On the other hand, the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message seizes the uplink
bandwidth. Therefore, when the uplink TBF already exists, the uplink expenditure is
reduced and the uplink data bandwidth is increased if the frequency of sending the data
blocks with RRBP flag is reduced.
This feature dynamically adjusts the frequency for sending the data blocks with the
RRBP flag based on whether the uplink TBF exists during the delayed downlink TBF
release. If the uplink TBF exists and the downlink TBF is in the delayed release state
after the data transmission in the downlink is complete, the BSS uses a low frequency to
save the uplink bandwidth. If the uplink TBF does not exist, there is less data to be sent
in the uplink. At this time, the BSS uses a high frequency to increase the uplink access
rate of the MS.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
217
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.12.19 GBFD-119303 Load Sharing

Availability
Summary
Based on the traffic load on the PDCHs, load sharing applies to the dynamic adjustment of the
MS distribution on the PDCHs to improve the channel utilization and single-user PS service
rate.
Benefits
This feature helps improve the channel utilization and PS service rate.
Description
The strategy for load sharing includes the following three parts:
When an MS accesses the network, the system preferentially assigns a TRX with a light load
to the MS to adjust the load distribution between TRXs.
When the MS provides PS services, the system assigns the MS a PDCH or PDCHs with a
light load. The occupancy of channel resources varies during the transmission. For example, if
the MS releases channel resources when the service ends, some TRXs or PDCHs are idle. If
the MS accessing the network is not shifted from the channel with heavy load to the channel
with a light load, the channel resources are wasted. According to the load on the PDCHs, the
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
218
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
BSS shifts the MS carried on the PDCH with a heavy load to the one with a light load.
Therefore, load sharing is implemented and the single-user rate increases.
When the channel is released, the system adjusts the load distribution between channels
according to the traffic load on each channel to ensure load balance on the PDCHs, optimally
utilizing channel resources.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Load sharing during the release of radio resources: This function enhances the load
balance between TRXs when radio resources are released. Therefore, the resources on all
the TRXs are reassigned in the cell. That is, the MSs carried on the TRXs with a heavy
load are assigned to those with a light load, and then the MSs carried on the PDCHs with
a heavy load are assigned to those with a light load so that the load balance between all
the TRXs in the cell is realized and the channel resources are optimally utilized. For
example, an MS transmits data for a long time. During the data transmission, if radio
resources are released by other MSs, the BSC determines whether the TRX used by the
MSs that release radio resources are idle. If the TRX is idle, the MS performing longtime data transmission is reassigned with the channels on the idle TRX. Therefore, the
throughput of the MS is increased.
When the traffic load of the GPRS channels decreases, some GPRS MSs are shifted from
the EGPRS channel to the GPRS channels to increase the channel utilization and
minimize the impact on the EGPRS services.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
219
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.12.20 GBFD-119501 Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink

and Downlink Channels
Availability
Summary
The uplink and downlink channel adaptive adjustment implements dynamic assignment of the
number of uplink and downlink channels for the MSs based on the uplink and downlink
service data flow.
Benefits
In the case of the services that are processed on both the uplink and downlink such as ping
large packets and Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC), this feature helps to reduce the system
transmission delay.
In the case of the downlink-preferred services such as FTP download, this feature helps
improve the downlink data throughput.
In the case of the uplink-preferred services such as e-mail sending, this feature, used together
with extended dynamic allocation (EDA), helps improve the uplink data throughput.
Description
The BSS measures the data throughput of uplink and downlink of each temporary block flow
(TBF) regularly to determine the current service type of the TBF.
If the downlink-preferred service is performed, the BSS assigns as many downlink timeslots
as possible to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 4+1 DL/UL
timeslot configuration preferentially.
If the uplink-preferred service is performed, the BSS assigns as many uplink timeslots as
possible to the MS. For an MS with multislot class of 12, the BSS uses the 1+4 DL/UL
timeslot configuration preferentially used together with EDA.
If the service processed on both the uplink and downlink is performed, the BSS tries to assign
the timeslots of uplink and downlink asymmetrically to the MS. For an MS with multislot
class of 12, the BSS uses the 3+2 DL/UL timeslot configuration preferentially.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
220
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.12.21 GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF

Availability
Summary
This feature ensures that the TBF is not released when no data is transmitted. In this manner,
the TBF does not need to be re-established after the data is transmitted again. Therefore,
frequent TBF establishment and releases are avoided.
Benefits
This feature reduces the cost for establishing the uplink TBF, shortens the data transmission
time in the uplink, and increases the uplink rate.
Description
After the uplink data is sent, the common uplink TBF is released immediately whereas the
extended uplink TBF enters the inactive period. If there is new data to be transmitted, the TBF
in inactive period enters the active period for data transmission. If the inactive period timer
expires and there is no data to be transmitted, the TBF is released. The inactive period timer is
an adjustable parameter pertaining to network optimization.
With this feature, the throughput rate of the services with unstable data flow such as webpage
browsing and email sending is improved.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
This feature adaptively adjusts the frequency for sending PACKET UPLINK
ACK/NACK messages.
During downloading services, TCP ACK messages (which are very short), are frequently
transmitted on the uplink. When an MS in extended uplink TBF mode is downloading
data, the BSC does not send a PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message to the MS upon
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
221
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
receiving a TCP ACK message. Instead, the BSC sends a PACKET UPLINK
ACK/NACK message to the MS only after receiving a certain number of TCP ACK
messages. This decreases the overhead of downlink signaling in extended uplink TBF
mode, increasing the downloading speed. The frequency for sending PACKET UPLINK
ACK/NACK messages is determined by one of the network optimization parameters.
Increases the throughput of downloading services effectively.
Decreases the signaling load on control channels from 19% to 2%.
Increases the downloading rate by 5% when an MS uses four PDCHs exclusively to
perform downloading services.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
1.13 Antenna System Solution

1.13.1 MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower
Mounted Amplifier)
Availability
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
222
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Summary
This feature provides a solution to the TMA connection. Huawei MBTS complies with the
AISG1.1 and AISG2.0 protocols.
Benefits
In the uplink coverage-limited network, the use of the TMA can improve the receiver
sensitivity, enlarge the cell radius, reduce the number of MBTSs, and save the cost.
Description
The TMA is used to amplify the uplink signals. It is an optional device for the antenna system.
The TMA can compensate the feeder loss caused by long feeders. Therefore, the uplink
sensitivity is increased and the uplink coverage capability is improved.
Huawei MBTS supports the third-party TMA, including AISG TMA.
The MBTS supplies power to and controls the TMA. Huawei MBTS can provide 10 V to 13
V output voltage to the TMA. When a major alarm related to the TMA is reported, the system
automatically sets the attenuation value of the RX channel to 0. After the alarm is cleared, the
system automatically sets the attenuation value of the RX channel to the configured value.
In the case of the AISG TMA, the RET control signal, power, and RF signal are transmitted
using the feeder cable. Therefore, operation and maintenance of the AISG TMA is easy. Smart
bias tee (SBT) provides power supply to the TMA and the RET control signal to the RCU
using the feeder cable.
Huawei provides dual TMAs. Each TMA consists of two TX/RX branches, and only one
TMA is required in each sector. Each TMA includes also a supervision and alarm unit in the
low noise amplifier (LNA). The functions of both branches are the same and the function of
one pair of branches is described as follows:
The RX channel of each branch consists of two RX filters and an LNA. The LNA can be
automatically bypassed when the DC is faulty. There is a bias tee in the BTS port of the TMA.
For the SMART TMA, this bias tee is called the smart bias tee. Bias tee can separate the DC
current from the RF signals and provide power supply to the LNA and the RET control signal
to the RCU. The TX channel includes a TX filter.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
223
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Huawei MBTS supports two kinds of TMA with the gain of 24 dB and 12 dB.
Enhancement
GBSS6.1
Complies with the AISG1.1 protocol.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The DBS3900 (RRU3004) and BTS3900B/BTS3900E do not support this feature. The
BTS3006C and BTS3002E require a DATM board. The BTS3012 and BTS3012AE
require a DATU board. The BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L (DRFU) require a
GATM board.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
224
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features

NA
1.13.2 MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt

Availability
Summary
The feature provides a solution to remote adjustment of the antenna tilt. The user can adjust
the remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna tilt on the U2000 or LMT.
Benefits
The RET antennas in multiple sites can be remotely adjusted. Therefore, the efficiency of
adjusting the antenna tilt is improved and the cost of network optimization is reduced.
The adjustment of the RET antenna is not affected by the weather.
It is easy to adjust the RET antenna of a site that is difficult to reach.
Description
The tilt of the RET antenna can be adjusted remotely.
After an antenna is installed, the antenna tilt needs to be adjusted to optimize the network.
The antenna tilt can be remotely adjusted through the electrical control.
The phase shifter of the antenna can be controlled by the stepper motor outside the antenna.
You can adjust the antenna tilt when the system is powered on and monitor the tilt in real
time. Therefore, the precise remote adjustment of the antenna tilt can be achieved.
The following figure shows the operating principle of the RET antenna.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
225
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Figure 1.1 Working principle of the RET antenna
Remote Control Unit (RCU) is the driving motor of the phase shifter of the RET antenna. The
RCU receives and executes the control commands from the MBTS to drive the stepper motor.
A pulling bar connects the stepper motor and the phase shifter. When the stepper motor is
triggered, the pulling bar moves and then the phase of the phase shifter changes through the
gears. In this situation, the phase of each element of the array antenna changes regularly.
Then, the direction of the main beam of the antenna changes accordingly. Therefore, the
antenna tilt is adjusted.
The MBTS supplies the DC power to the stepper motor and communicates with it on the
AISG interface on the motor.
In the Huawei RET solution, the RET antenna can be controlled remotely or locally by a
command sent from the U2000 or LMT.
The MBTS modulates that command to the On-Off-Keying (OOK) signals. The RF module
transfers the DC power and the OOK signals to the STMA or the SBT using the feeder cables.
The STMA or the SBT demodulates the OOK signals to RS485 signals and then sends the
RS485 signals and part of the DC power to the RCU. No additional control cable is required.
The Huawei RET solution supports the RET cascading control. Several cascading RET
antennas can be controlled by the signals coming from the same control cable. The cascading
solution helps save the cost of the SBTs.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
226
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The Huawei RET solution supports the 2G/3G RET cascading control. The 3G RET antennas
can be cascaded with the 2G RET antennas. At the OMC of the 2G RET antenna, you can
control the tilt of the 3G RET antenna. Meanwhile, at the OMC of the 3G RET antenna, you
can control the tilt of the 2G RET antenna. The cascading helps save the cost of SBTs and
STMAs when the 2G and 3G RET antennas are installed in the same place.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
227
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. The BTS3006C and
BTS3002E require a DATM board. The BTS3012 and BTS3012AE require a DATU
board. The BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L (DRFU) require a GATM board. The
RU3922E does not support this feature.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.13.3 MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive

Diversity
Availability
Summary
This feature is a technique for improving the receive performance of the uplink channels.
Benefits
This feature improves receiver sensitivity and uplink coverage, reducing the CAPEX.
Description
With this feature, the same signal is received by two antennas. Then the two ways of signals
on the two antennas are combined after being processed. Therefore, the signal attenuation is
reduced.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
228
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
This feature enhances the RX capability of uplink channels. Huawei MBTS supports both
receive diversity and none receive diversity.
With this feature, the MBTS does not require additional devices and algorithms. Compared
with one-way none receive diversity, this feature requires twice the number of RX channels.
In typical scenarios, the receiver sensitivity can be improved by 2 to 3 dB.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.14 Synchronization Mechanism

1.14.1 MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock
Availability
Summary
The synchronization of the MBTS clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization. The
MBTS uses this feature to obtain the reference clock sources for the internal frame
synchronization. The MBTS supports three clock synchronization modes: synchronization
with the Iub/Abis clock, synchronization with the BITS clock, and synchronization with GPS
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
229
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
clock. In addition, the MBTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to temporarily provide
reference source.
Benefits
With this feature, the internal clock can be synchronized with the transmission network
without using the auxiliary equipment, saving the cost. In addition, the precision of the
synchronized clock meets the requirements of the radio transmission network and frequencies.
Description
In compliance with the 3GPP specifications, the frequency stability of the master clock of the
MBTS must be between -C0.05 ppm and +0.05 ppm. The MBTS can work in multiple clock
synchronization modes to suit different clock topologies:
Synchronization with the Iub/Abis clock (default mode)

The clock source of the MBTS is synchronized with the line clock sources of its upperlevel NE such as the MBSC.
Synchronization with GPS

The GPS card is optional unless the MBTS uses a GPS clock as its clock source.
The clock signals are processed and synchronized as follows:
The GPS antenna system receives GPS signals at 1575.42 MHz, and then transmits the
signals to the GPS card. The system can trace up to eight (generally three or four)
satellites simultaneously. The GPS card processes the signals and transmits them to the
main clock module.
Synchronization with the BITS clock

The MBTS can synchronize its clocks with the 2 MHz clock signals from an external
reference clock. The reference clock can be a BITS clock or a 2 MHz clock from the
transmission equipment.
By performing phase locking and frequency dividing, the main clock module converts
the clock signals into various clock signals required by the MBTS, for example, F_CLK,
CLK_4X, and BFN.
In addition to the preceding three synchronization modes, the MBTS internal clock can work
in free-run mode to keep the MBTS running.
The enhanced stratum 3 OCXO with a high precision works as the master clock of the MBTS.
The OCXO can guarantee the normal operation of the MBTS for up to 90 days.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support GPS clock or
BITS clock. BTS3012 and BTS3012AE require a DGPS board. BTS3900, BTS3900A,
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
230
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, and DBS3900 require a USCU board to support the GPS clock
or BITS clock.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, and DBS3900 require a USCU board
to support the GPS clock or BITS clock.
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.14.2 MRFD-210502 BSC/RNC Clock

Availability
Summary
With this feature, five types of clock sources are supported. Each clock source supports
functions such as 1+1 backup, management of the clock source, query of the clock status, and
maintenance of the link clock.
Benefits
This feature provides various clock input schemes for operators.
The clock source backup function prevents the primary clock faults from affecting services.
Description
MBSC clock provides reliable clock sources for the MBSC to meet the requirements of the
clock precision defined in the 3GPP specifications. Every type of clock source supports 1+1
backup.
The MBSC clock subsystem consists of the clock processing board GCUa/GCGa and the
clock processing unit in each subrack. The external reference clock signals are transmitted to
the GCUa/GCGa. After a phase lock on the GCUa/GCGa, the clock signals are changed to 8
kHz clock signals. The signals are then transmitted to the SCUa in the same subrack through
the backplane and to the SCUa in the EPS through clock signal cables. Then, the 8 kHz clock
signals on the SCUa are transmitted to other boards in the same subrack through the
backplane.
When the clock source is faulty, the MBSC reports the related alarms and starts the 1+1
backup scheme to ensure the normal operation of the system.
The MBSC clock sources are as follows:
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
231
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Building integrated timing supply system (BITS)
Line clock extracted from the A/Iu or Abis/Iub interface
Global positioning system (GPS) satellite synchronization clock
8 kHz clock provided by an external device
Local oscillator clock
The MBSC provides the clock control setting functions, including management of the clock
source, query of the clock status, and maintenance of the line clock. The MBSC requires only
one clock source, and the clock source can work in automatic, manual, or self-oscillation
mode.
Automatic
In automatic mode, you do not need to specify a clock source for the current clock. The
system automatically selects a clock source with the highest priority.
Manual
In manual mode, you need to manually specify a clock source for the current clock. The
system does not automatically switch to another clock source even if this clock source is
faulty.
Self-oscillation
The self-oscillation mode is the default clock working mode of the system.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
The GCGa board is required if the GPS satellite synchronization clock is used.
BSC6910 Hardware
The GCGa board is required if the GPS satellite synchronization clock is used.
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
232
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.14.3 GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization

Availability
Summary
The BTS supports the GPS synchronization through a satellite.
Benefits
The frame synchronization on the Um interface in the entire network by using the GPS
provides high synchronization precision and easy implementation.
When the network works in synchronous mode, the features such as ICC and IBCA can
be used to increase the network capacity by more than 40%.
This feature improves the KPIs such as the MOS, paging success rate, handover success
rate, call drop rate, and traffic volume.
Description
In the existing GSM system, the BTSs work in asynchronous mode, resulting in timeslot
overlapping. In the asynchronous network with the tight frequency reuse pattern, the
overlapping of timeslots causes unnecessary and unpredictable interference because the
frequency reuse distance between two cells using the same frequency is relatively short. The
interference (that is, channel quality) rather than the number of channels restricts the network
performance. Therefore, the BTSs in the entire network synchronize with each other based on
the reference clock signals provided by the GPS satellite.
The GPS clock system of the BTS receives the related information sent by the GPS satellite
and then obtains the GPS absolute time and precise 1PPS pulse signals. The BTS clock circuit
traces the 1PPS pulse signals to obtain the reference clock and then obtains various clock
signals based on the reference clock. Each BTS in the network adjusts the frame number
based on the absolute frame number calculated from the GPS absolute time received by the
BTS software.
Enhancement
Each BTS is equipped with a GPS for hardware synchronization of the entire network, which
increases the costs. Therefore, the Soft-Synchronized Network feature, which is an optional
feature, is introduced to GBSS8.0 to realize the frame synchronization on the Um interface
through software. For details, see the GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network feature.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Copyright Huawei
233
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support this feature. The
BTS3012 and BTS3012AE require a DGPS board. The DBS3900 and BTS3900 require
a USCU board.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
The DBS3900 and BTS3900 require a USCU board.
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.14.4 GBFD-118606 Clock Over IP

Availability
Summary
The Clock over IP feature provides high-precision clock synchronization for several BTSs in
the GBSS IP network. Compared with the Global Positioning System (GPS) clock, Clock
over IP is a cost-effective clock solution for BTS synchronization. The transmission cost is
high because the IP timing packets are sent continuously. Huawei GBSS equipment allows
operators to define the interval for sending IP timing packets, reducing the transmission
bandwidth while ensuring the BTS clock synchronization.
Benefits
Provides clock synchronization to guarantee the normal operation of the GSM system in
the IP-based GSM network.
Significantly reduces the cost of network deployment compared with the GPS clock
synchronization.
Description
Clock over IP consists of the IP clock server and the IP clock client. The IP clock server
extracts reference clock source from a clock device, such as a GPS or building integrated
timing supply (BITS). Then, the IP clock server sends the clock synchronization information
to the BTS by sending timing packets. As the IP clock client, the BTS performs the adaptation
on the IP packets and obtains the clock synchronization information.
Every IP timing packet occupies a certain bandwidth. Therefore, in the case of leased network
or satellite transmission, the continuous transmission of IP timing packets increases the
CAPEX and may even affect the ongoing services during peak hours. The GBSS allows
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
234
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
operators to define the interval for sending IP timing packets. In such a case, the IP timing
packets can be sent only when the network load is light. The BTS clock provided by the
GBSS can maintain a precision of 0.05 ppm within 90 days. Therefore, sending the IP timing
packets regularly saves the bandwidth while ensuring the BTS clock synchronization. The
application scenario of Clock over IP is shown in the following figure:
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Enhanced Clock over IP is available, which is used for the flexible configuration of clock
synchronization mode.
GBSS9.0
The BTS supports primary and secondary IP clock servers. If the primary IP clock server
becomes faulty, the path to extract clock signals is switched to the secondary IP clock
server, enhancing the flexibility and reliability of the IP clock networking. The IP clock
servers can be configured on the basis of BTSs.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
An IP clock server is required. 3900 series base stations do not support Huawei
proprietary protocols in GBSS9.0 that supports IEEE1588v2 standards. Active and
standby clocks support IEEE1588v2 standards. BTS3012 series base stations support
both Huawei proprietary protocols and IEEE1588v2 standards. The BTS3006C and
BTS3002E do not support this feature. The GTMUa board does not support G.8265.1.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Copyright Huawei
235
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
An independent IP clock server is required.

NA
1.15 Maintainability and Testing

1.15.1 GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis
Availability
Summary
Software testing of BSC to determine whether there is one-way audio or cross-talk on the
network. Creates a log of calls on which crosstalk occurs, and provides an alarm mechanism.
Benefits
Alarms allow operators to quickly discover problems with voice quality on the network, and
in conjunction with fault checks, assists with improving network quality.
Creating a log of calls on which crosstalk occurs, which helps with problem diagnosis and
improves efficiency in Operations and Maintenance.
Description
Complaints may arise if problems such as one-way audio or crosstalk frequently occur. With
this type of network problem, without a clear record of the times at which faults occurred, it
can be very difficult to diagnose.
This feature automatically conducts follow-up on a single call, determines whether one-way
or cross talk has occurred. If the problem occurs, it will be recorded in the log: user ID, cell,
affected carrier frequencies and channels. This gives maintenance personnel accurate data that
they can use in problem diagnosis, without having to wait for the problem to reoccur. The
anonymous IMSI and MSISDN will be recorded in the log.
This alarm mechanism associated with this feature regularly collates the one-way radio and
cross talk records for the BSC. If the frequency exceeds a certain threshold, it will make an
alarm report. There is no need to wait for high levels of customer complaints: it is possible to
discover network quality issues very early.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
236
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The cross talk test identifies voice coding in the following ways: FR, EFR, AMR_FR
(excluding 12.2 kbit/s), AMR-HR (excluding 6.7 kbit/s and 7.4 kbit/s). The one-way test
supports all voice coding types, but does not support tests of CSD services. Because of the
testing mechanism used, this feature can detect cross talk and one-way problems caused by
problems between the BTS and the A interface; but problems caused by errors between the
Um interface and MSC cannot be detected.
This feature is controlled with an on/off switch. When set to on, the function is effective, and
it has no obvious impact on overall BSC performance.
The cross talk tests are effective during TDM transmission; one-way tests are effective for
both TDM and IP transmission.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
Support
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115702 TrFO
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1

Aboved 8 features are matually exclusive with crosstalk detection.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
237
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Aboved 2 features are matually exclusive with one-way radio detection.
1.15.2 GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis

Availability
Summary
Ability to test for crossed pairs at the connection to the Abis interface during TDM
transmission.
Benefits
Alarm for effective early warning of crossed pair issues, reducing subsequent user complaints.
Description
Abis transmission crossed pair detection supports testing for problems with transmission to
the Abis interface. When a transmission issue arises because of a connection error, this feature
automatically detects the issue, designates the transmission as faulty, and assigns no further
services to it.
The principle behind Abis crossed pair testing is that a command link is assigned to every
physical transmission, and command negotiations can be used to determine whether the
transmission has a fault. This feature is therefore effective in detecting crossed pairs between
different physical transmissions within a single BS. It can detect most crossed pair issues
between transmissions from different BSs, but is ineffective in the following scenarios: when
the configurations of the two BSs are identical, and the crossed pair arises between
transmissions from the same port on the respective BSs. In this situation, even if there is an
error with the physical connections from each BS, because the configurations are identical,
the LAPD connections can all be established as normal.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
The BSC6900 supports this feature in TDM mode
BSC6910 Hardware
The BSC6910 supports this feature in TDM mode.
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The GBTS(GTMU) supports this feature in TDM mode.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
MS
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
CN
Copyright Huawei
238
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.15.3 GBFD-119307 Spectrum Scan

Availability
Summary
Using existing board configurations, the Spectrum Scan feature enables maintenance
personnel to perform spectrum scan on the working frequencies on the uplink receive band
over the Um interface.
Benefits
This feature helps evaluate the interference to working frequencies, facilitating routine
network optimization and interference detection.
Description
With this feature, Huawei GBSS performs a long-period spectrum scan on working
frequencies. This helps evaluate the interference to the working frequencies and resolve
interference issues.
With this feature, all working frequencies for a single timeslot of a single carrier are scanned
for a maximum of 48 hours. Scanning results are then sent to the LMT and saved so that users
learn about the uplink interference strength of the working frequencies in a cell. During a
spectrum scan, only the specified timeslot is out of service, and the cell capacity is not
affected.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. Non-optimized DTRU and
QTRU do not support this feature. Optimized DTRU does not support frequency time
domain scan.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
239
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.15.4 GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing

Availability
Summary
Based on the existing frequency and power configurations for a cell, the Intermodulation
Testing feature helps detect the interference to working frequencies caused by intermodulation
products of the antenna system.
Benefits
During routine operation and maintenance (O&M), O&M personnel often need to perform
passive intermodulation (PIM) testing on all sites. The testing efficiency is low without the
Intermodulation Testing feature. The reason is as follows: The BTS sends dummy bursts to
each cell when the BTS is idle and when the BTS transmits signals at full power; then, the
O&M personnel have to compare interference band-related counters for the two periods for
each cell. With this feature, O&M personnel simply run a command to start testing, and the
test results are automatically displayed on the LMT. This improves operational efficiency, for
example, the testing on a single site takes only a few minutes.
Description
Besides the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR), intermodulation products generated by the
antenna system also affect the uplink receive quality if the intermodulation products fall
within the receive frequency band.
Based on the existing frequency and power configurations for a cell, online PIM testing
automatically and quickly measures the intermodulation products that fall within the receive
frequency band and then determines whether the cell is experiencing intermodulation
interference according to the PIM testing threshold specified by users.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
240
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. Non-optimized DTRU and
QTRU do not support this feature. Optimized DTRU does not support offline
intermodulation testing.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.15.5 GBFD-118607 IP Performance Monitor

Availability
Summary
IP performance monitor (PM) checks the performance of transmission between the BSC and a
BTS in an IP network. By effectively monitoring the changes in QoS-related parameters, IP
PM quickly checks the QoS of an IP bearer network over the Abis interface online. The check
results serve as a basis for flow control and admission control.
Benefits
This feature provides the following functions:
Reports alarms when the packet loss rate for online services exceeds a specified
threshold. For example, an alarm is reported when the transmission quality of the IP
bearer network deteriorates.
Performs real-time performance monitoring and traffic measurement. This reduces

maintenance costs by letting operators know the transmission network quality in real
time and locate and isolate transmission problems such as unstable transmission rates.
Monitors the bandwidth change for an IP bearer network online, which provides a
reference for dynamic bandwidth adjustment over the Abis interface.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
241
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
IP PM is a Huawei proprietary protocol and requires support from the BSC and BTS. When IP
transmission is used between the BSC and a BTS, IP PM can be used to check the end-to-end
transmission quality.
The IP PM protocol defines Forward Monitoring (FM) and Backward Reporting (BR)
measurement frames. After IP PM is enabled, the local end (BSC or BTS) periodically sends
FM frames and the peer end (BTS or BSC) responds with BR frames. An FM frame contains
the number of service packets/bytes transmitted in a measurement period and the sending
time. After receiving the FM frames, the peer end adds the receiving time and the number of
service packets/bytes received in the current measurement period to the BR frames and then
sends the BR frames containing the sending time.
Figure 1-5 shows the IP PM procedure.
Figure 1.1 IP PM procedure
After being calculated by using the following methods, the information contained in the FM
and BR frames indicates the QoS change for an IP bearer network.
The packet loss rate in the current measurement period can be calculated by using the
following formula:
Packet loss rate = (Number of transmitted packets in FM frames - Number of received packets
in BR frames)/Number of transmitted packets in FM frames
The loopback delay and transmission jitter can be calculated based on the sending time and
receiving time recorded in the FM and BR frames.
IP PM can monitor an IP link or certain types of services such as EDGE services and CS
services in real time. The monitoring results provide a reference for determining the fault
location.
By monitoring a measured IP link between the BSC and a BTS in real time, IP PM calculates
the delay, jitter, and packet loss rate for the IP link, providing a basis for flow control and
admission control. When the delay jitter or packet loss rate on the measured link increases, the
traffic on the logical port where the link is configured is adjusted to reduce the link load and
relieve the link congestion.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
Enhanced IP PM can accurately collect statistics on IP packets. In addition, collecting
statistics on IP packets is performed at the IP layer, helping provide accurate statistical
results when an IP packet is divided into two packets.
IP PM can be enabled when IP over E1/T1 mode is used on the BTS side.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
242
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
The alarm mechanism is improved and now has an appropriate alarm threshold, provides
detailed IP PM activation failure causes and measurement failure causes, and provides
related operations.
The GUI is optimized. The parameters related to real-time performance monitoring and
traffic measurement are optimized, improving user experience.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
One of the following IP Interface boards is required over the Abis interface:
FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/FG2d/GOUd
BSC6910 Hardware
One of the following IP Interface boards is required over the Abis interface:
FG2c/GOUc/FG2d/GOUd
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support this feature. The UTRPc and GTMUb
boards support IP PM enhanced in GBSS14.0. The GTMUa, BTS3012, BTS3012AE,
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support IP PM enhanced in
GBSS14.0 but support traffic statistics and packet loss alarm reporting.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA

NA
1.15.6 GBFD-118614 GSM PS Service Map

Availability
Summary
This feature enables the BSC to record PS service information, including service type,
terminal type, and measurement reports. Based on the service information, the Nastar presents
grid-based geographical PS service traffic distribution by terminal type or service type.
Benefits
By using a visualization tool, this feature helps mobile network operators identify the resource
distribution and bottlenecks of the entire network. This feature also helps operators deal with
a flood of data and guides hot spot coverage planning and network capacity expansion.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
243
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Description
By using the Nastar based on the Geographic Information System (GIS), this feature provides
the following functions:
Displaying PS traffic volume by service type
The BSC identifies the types of terminals used such as dual-mode MSs or data cards and
records service information. Based on the service information, the Nastar calculates total PS
traffic volume on a per-grid basis and displays the traffic volume by terminal type. If the
traffic volume of dual-mode MSs or data cards is too large in certain grids, interoperability
parameters can be modified to balance the system load. This helps improve service quality
and increases resource usage.
Providing accurate WLAN deployment
The BSC identifies the IDs of terminals processing PS services and records service
information. Based on the service information and terminal IDs, the Nastar determines
terminal types, for example, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) capable terminals and data cards. In
addition, the Nastar calculates total PS traffic volume on a per-grid basis and displays the
traffic volume by terminal type. If the total traffic volume of Wi-Fi-capable terminals is too
large in certain grids, wireless local area networks (WLANs) can be deployed in these hot
spots.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
The MS must support NC1 or NC2.
CN
Other NEs
The Nastar must support this feature.
GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
244
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
1.15.7 GBFD-115402 LCS (Cell ID + TA)

Availability
Summary
The built-in SMLC supports the Cell ID+TA location service. In addition, the MS location
information can be directly displayed on the BSC LMT.
Benefits
Locates MSs.
Increases operators' revenues by providing weather forecasts, trip scheduling, emergency

assistance, stock information, business planning, and transportation information.
Improves the efficiency for handling problems, such as emergencies, disaster relief,
routine network optimization, customers' complaints by providing location information.
Description
LCS is a series of services that are achieved based on locating MSs in a certain range, such as
locating an emergency call or MSs for value-added services (VAS). LCS must meet the
specified QoS, such as the required accuracy and latency.
Huawei supports the Cell ID+TA positioning scheme based on the BSS and NSS. The
positioning precision of this scheme is about 500 meters.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
Huawei BSS supports the simplified LCS on the basis of the NSS-based LCS and BSSbased LCS. The BSC analyzes the MS location information and sends the information to
the BSC LMT. The cell global identification (CGI), timing advance (TA), longitude and
latitude of a cell, azimuth, and error are provided in the MS tracing results.
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
CN
Copyright Huawei
245
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
1.15.8 GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM

Availability
Summary
The GBSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (802.3ah) and
end-to-end Ethernet OAM (802.1ag). The functions of Ethernet OAM consist of fault
detection, monitoring, verification, and identification. Through these functions, this feature
achieves reliability and high availability of Ethernet services.
Benefits
The Ethernet OAM helps the operator to manage user access in terms of detection,
monitoring, and rectification of Ethernet faults.
This feature achieves reliability and high availability of Ethernet services, enables the service
provider to provide economical and efficient advanced Ethernet services, and ensures that the
services have high quality and reliability that are required by telecommunications services.
This feature is implemented at the GBSS equipment, minimizing the impact of Ethernet
bandwidth fluctuation or faults on the GBSS.
Description
With the introduction of IP GSM, the Ethernet as a type of transport bearer is widely used. As
a Layer 2 protocol, Ethernet OAM can report the status of the network at the data link layer.
Therefore, the network is monitored and managed more effectively. The functions of Ethernet
OAM consist of fault detection, monitoring, verification, and identification. The faults involve
the hardware faults that can be detected by the physical layer, such as link failure, and the
software faults that cannot be detected by the physical layer, such as memory bridging unit
damage. Ethernet OAM plays a significant role in reducing CAPEX/OPEX and complying
with the Service Level Agreement (SLA).
The GBSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (802.3ah) and
end-to-end Ethernet OAM (802.1ag).
1. Point-to-point Ethernet OAM
The point-to-point Ethernet OAM complies with IEEE 802.3ah. The point-to-point Ethernet
OAM concerns the OAM of the last mile rather than the specific services. The OAM
implements point-to-point maintenance of the Ethernet using mechanisms such as OAM
discovery, loopback, link monitoring, and fault detection.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
246
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
2. End-to-end Ethernet OAM

The end-to-end Ethernet OAM complies with IEEE 802.1ag. Regarding the OAM domain as
a whole, the end-to-end Ethernet OAM establishes end-to-end detection to perform
maintenance of the Ethernet based on the services.
When the BSC detects Ethernet faults or degraded network performance through the Ethernet
OAM, the BSC, based on the practical configuration, can perform operations such as route
reselection, port switchover, and board switchover to ensure proper communication on the
Ethernet.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
The Abis, A, and Gb interfaces require IP Interface boards.
BSC6910 Hardware
The Abis, A, and Gb interfaces require IP Interface boards.
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
Need GTMUb or UTRP to support.
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
Support
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
The Ethernet OAM protocol should be supported by the interconnected transmission
equipment.
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
GBFD-118603 Gb over IP

Copyright Huawei
247
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
NA
1.15.9 GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling

Tracing
Availability
Summary
This feature enables you to collect the information about the specified MS if required and then
collect the traced faults in a specific network element using only a few system resources. In
this manner, you can rectify the faults effectively.
Benefits
It is difficult to locate the service faults in MSs because the communications network
becomes increasingly complicated. You can detect the section where the fault occurs only
when the information about the whole process of one MS is collected. By using the end-toend MS signaling tracing feature, you can completely record the service activities of an MS
and then locate the section where the fault occurs. The recorded information covers all the
network elements involved in the service of the MS. If the traced MS is properly defined, the
valid location information can be obtained without using a large amount of processing and
transmission resources of the system in the whole tracing process.
Description
With this feature, you can create or delete a tracing task in the HLR. The HLR sends the
tracing activation message to the MSC/VLR where the MS is located. When the traced MS
initiates services, the MSC notifies the BSC to perform tracing. When the MS is switched
over to a new MSC, location update is initiated. Then the HLR sends a tracing activation
message to the new MSC/VLR and the tracing task of the original MSC is complete.
When receiving the message of starting a tracing task from the MSC, the BSC traces
information about all the interfaces and then saves the information to the BAM. The
information is saved as a .tmf file, which is used for interface tracing on the BSC LMT. The
file can be browsed using the function of interface tracing review on the BSC LMT. When
browsing the information about a traced MS, you can choose a time segment and choose the
message field to be viewed in a message filter window.
The BSC supports a maximum of 64 tracing tasks (including single-MS signaling tracing,
interface signaling tracing, and end-to-end MS signaling tracing tasks). There should be at
least 16 end-to-end MS signaling tracing tasks. If the number of existing end-to-end MS
signaling tracing tasks reaches or exceeds 16, determine whether the total number of tasks
reaches the upper threshold when creating an end-to-end MS signaling tracing task. If the total
number does not reach the upper threshold, you can create more tasks. If the total number
reaches the upper threshold, task creation fails.
Enhancement
None
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
248
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
Other NEs
WOFD-190600 GBSS Enhanced Subscriber Tracing
WOFD-191400 G&U CS Subscriber Tracing

Aboved features on the U2000 are required.

NA
1.16 Documentation
1.16.1 MRFD-210701 Documentation
Availability
Summary
The feature describes the available documentation of the products.
Benefits
With this feature, the operators can obtain the product information and can perform
maintenance operations accordingly.
Description
The customer documentation includes the following documents:
MBSC documents
NodeB documents
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
249
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
BTS documents
The documentation covers the hardware description, installation, commissioning, operation,

and maintenance of the MBSC and MBTS.
The following table describes the documents:
Document Category
Description
Product Description
Describes the architecture, hardware

configuration, operation and maintenance,
and technical specifications of the product.
Hardware Description
Describes the hardware of NEs, such as the

cabinet, board, and cable.
Installation Guide
Describes the procedures for installing the

cabinet, boards, and cables.
Initial Configuration Guide
Describes how to perform the initial

configuration of NEs.
Commissioning Guide
Describes how to commission the NE to

ensure that the new NE can gain access to
the BSS/RAN system.
LMT User Guide
Describes the GUI, functions, and

operations of the LMT.
Site Maintenance Guide
Describes the hardware maintenance items

and the component replacement procedures
Routine Maintenance Guide
Describes the routine maintenance methods

of the MBSC and MBTS.
Reconfiguration Guide
Describes the common tasks and methods of

data reconfiguration of the MBSC and
MBTS.
Reference
The reference documents are as follows:
MML command reference: describes the

information about meanings,
recommended values, and default
values of the parameters of each
command.
Alarm reference: describes the

information about meanings of the
alarms and how to clear them.
Performance counter reference: describes

the information about meanings and
measurement points of each counter.
The documents have the following characteristics:
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)
Topic-oriented: Based on the DITA technology, the information is provided under

separate topics.
Copyright Huawei
250
GBSS16.0
1 Basic Features
Powerful advanced search: The information can be searched according to products or

data types.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
BSC6900 Hardware
NA
BSC6910 Hardware
NA
GBTS(GTMU) Hardware
NA
GBTS(UMPT) Hardware
NA
MS
NA
CN
NA
Other NEs
NA
NA

NA
Issue 04 (2015-03-04)

Copyright Huawei
251

GBSS16.0 Basic Feature Description

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

GBSS16.0 Basic Feature Description

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

GBSS16.

Basic Feature Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

1.4.3 GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment........................................................................................................................45

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

1.9.4 GBFD-111214 Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery..................................................................108

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

1.10.33 GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink..............................................................................167

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

1.13.3 MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity...............................................................................................228

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

1.1 System Improvement

The BSC supports a maximum of 3072 TRXs.

In MBSC mode, O&M, radio resources management, IP transmission, and hardware

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

GBSS9.0 supports EDGE+ evolution, including the Uplink EGPRS2-A, Downlink

GBSS9.0 supports EGPRS service enhancement, including the Conversational QoS, PS

Mutually Exclusive Features

1.1.2 GBFD-110001 GBSS12.0 System Improvement

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Increases the BSC capacity.

Enables the BSC support more network topologies.

Improves the reliability of the network topologies.

Enhances maintainability and testability.

Improves the O&M efficiency in GBSS12.0.

Mutually Exclusive Features

1.1.3 GBFD-110030 3GPP Protocol Compliance

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Mutually Exclusive Features

1.1.4 GBFD-110002 GBSS13.0 System Improvement

Use of a new TC board (DPUf) and enhanced system integration

Support for VAMOS

Support for identifying instance messaging services

Enhanced maintainability and testability

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

The voice quality improvement enhances customer satisfaction.

The Abis transmission solution enhances the transmission efficiency.

Mutually Exclusive Features

1.1.5 GBFD-110003 GBSS14.0 System Improvement

Increased system capacity

Decreased number of BTS migrations caused by internal GBSS problems

Improved load balancing capability on the GBSS control plane

Decreases the number of BTS migrations.

The BSC capacity is increased.

The transmission resource management method is optimized on the MPU board.

CPU loads of boards on the control plane are significantly balanced.

This fully utilizes the processing capability of the control plane.

New boards are added.

Mutually Exclusive Features

1.1.6 GBFD-110004 GBSS15.0 System Improvement

Enhanced system integration with the introduction of the BSC6910

Expanded network capacity

Optimized BSC flow control mechanism

Improved system maintenance capability

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Improves system reliability due to optimization of the flow control mechanism.

Increases the O&M efficiency of the GBSS system.